JP2020130566A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving taste.SOLUTION: In a component collection performance displaying, in a stepwise manner, component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 relating to a controller image Z1 and a push button image Z3 for use in an operation prompt performance before a performance control CPU 120 starts the operation prompt performance in a super-ready-to-win performance, when a collection-success component collection performance based on performance patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, in the operation prompt performance, an operation of a stick controller 31A is further improved via controller assembly performance, compared with a case where a collection-failure component collection performance based on a performance pattern PT2-1 is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-10

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, a push button or an operation lever is provided as a plurality of detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the push button or the operation lever is provided during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There are some that can execute a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the operation lever (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-57252

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when any operation of the push button and the operation lever is enabled, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

The game machine of means 1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result. And
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes stepwise starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. (See Fig. 8-16) and
With
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Or, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!").
When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect (for example, a set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). When the parts set effect of is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the parts set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. Part to be. See Fig. 8-10),
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of the specific effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example). , Each part image ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5 has a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters "?" Are displayed. (See Fig. 8-11),
further,
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the setting value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of FIGS. 9-15) and
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means capable of controlling the special state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the normal state (for example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state according to the jackpot type (CPU 103, etc. to control), and
As the display result of the variable display when controlled to the special state, the ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result depends on the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 048AKS010).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second aspect can be increased stepwise and suitably, so that the interest of the game is enjoyed. Is improved. In addition, since it is suggested which set value is set by the display result of the variable display in the special state, it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The specific effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the specific effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
When the specific effect executing means is in the advantageous state, the specific effect image is displayed at a higher rate than in the case where the advantageous state is not obtained, when a plurality of specific effect images are displayed stepwise in the specific effect. A portion in which the mode is changed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modification example of FIG. 8-33. 7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the display mode of the specific effect image changes while the number of display of the specific effect image increases.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the first aspect of the promotion effect and the second aspect of the promotion effect is executed in the specific effect, and then the specific effect execution means. Which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the part image is displayed in the first to third stages. ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to discriminate which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner in which the player can identify whether the part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the promotion effect of the second aspect will be executed because it is not known until the middle of the specific effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
When the specific effect image does not change to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect). When the push button 31B is determined, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are higher than the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 that succeed in set. Therefore, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the promotion effect is not executed.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the gaming machines of the following means 6 to 14. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is a high probability that the advantageous state will be controlled during the period from the end of the advantageous state until a predetermined number of variable displays are performed. It is possible to change to a state-controllable setting or to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and an effect according to the setting values before and after the change ( There was something that performed setting suggestion production). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the setting suggestion effect in the special state, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment in the special state. ..

The gaming machine of means 6
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the variable display of the identification information is variablely displayed and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result. ) And
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the setting value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of FIGS. 9-15) and
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means capable of controlling the special state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the normal state (for example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state according to the jackpot type (CPU 103, etc. to control), and
As the display result of the variable display when controlled to the special state, the ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result depends on the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 048AKS010).
Characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the display result of the variable display in the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6.
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means continues the special state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed (for example, the probability variation state is a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot game state. It ends when the special figure game is executed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, after being controlled during the special state, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest when the normal state is reached without being controlled in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 6 or 7.
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined results (for example, types A to C, etc.).
The type of the predetermined result to be displayed differs depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, different types of predetermined display are displayed at different ratios according to the set value).
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to which kind of predetermined result is displayed.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 8.
By setting the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target that has not been disclosed as a special result, a look-ahead effect for notifying that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result is executed. Further equipped with a look-ahead effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a look-ahead chance eye in step 048AKS012).
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the predetermined display. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the special result as the look-ahead effect and the predetermined result can be differentiated from each other, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being confused with the advance notice effect for the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 9.
By setting the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target that has not been disclosed as a special result, a look-ahead effect for notifying that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result is executed. Further equipped with a look-ahead effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a look-ahead chance eye in step 048AKS012).
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the predetermined display. Etc.),
While the special result can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays, the predetermined result is restricted so as not to be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays (for example, the look-ahead chance eye is spread over a plurality of variations). While it is possible to display continuously, the predetermined display is restricted so that it is not displayed continuously),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined result from being confused with the look-ahead effect by being continuously displayed.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 10.
At the timing controlled to the normal state after being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect indicating the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed in the special state (for example, the process of step 048AKS052 is executed). The effect control CPU 120 and the like that perform the display shown in FIG. 9-28 (f)),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the player can confirm the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed, and it is possible to easily predict the set value.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 11.
After being controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state and first controlled to the special state, when the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the advantageous state again, it is controlled to the normal state. It is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect indicating the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed (for example, the predetermined display is performed only at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the probability change state. (Displays the count value provided according to the type of),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily estimated by staying in a row.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to means 11 or 12.
Further equipped with a detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) for detecting the movement by the player,
The predetermined frequency display effect can be executed by detecting the movement of the player by the detection means (for example, based on the detection of the movement of the player with respect to the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). (Displays the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 11 to 13.
When the special state is continuously controlled a plurality of times, at the timing of transitioning from the special state to the normal state, the advantage corresponding to the special state a plurality of times without executing the predetermined frequency display effect. Execute a total number display effect that displays the number of game media given during the state (for example, execute the process of step 048AKS054 when it is determined Yes in step 048AKS051).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the total number display effect is executed instead of the predetermined frequency display effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine 1 used in the feature part 063SG. (A) is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the structure of a push button. (A) is a perspective view showing a ball striking operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of a ball striking operation handle. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 063SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process of the feature part 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing the operation target determination ratio in the operation promotion effect, (B) is a diagram showing the assembly effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is a diagram showing the content of the assembly effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the parts assembly effect pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing the component assembly effect pattern determination ratio. (A) is a diagram showing a change mode of the display mode of the push button in the parts assembly effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a change mode of the display mode of the stick controller in the parts assembly effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display of a feature part 063SG. FIGS. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the start of the super reach effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of parts assembly production. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern A or C. (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a timing chart explaining an example of production in a jackpot game state. It is a figure explaining the flow of the production from the start of a big hit game state to being controlled to a normal game state via a time saving state. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the flow effect of the game ball in the launch operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing a right-handed notification. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the assembly effect in the first modification of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing the super reach effect in the modified example 2 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the handle assembly effect in the modified example 3 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the path assembly effect in the modified example 4 of the feature portion 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing the operation mode of the movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. (A) to (C) are explanatory views which show the operation promotion effect as a modification 5. (D) to (G) are explanatory views showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 5. (A) to (C) are explanatory views which show the operation promotion effect as the modification 6 of this feature part 063SG. (A) to (E) are explanatory views which show the operation example of the component set production as the modification 7 of this feature part 063SG. (A) and (B) are explanatory views which show the operation example of the operation promotion effect as the modification 8 of this feature part 063SG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the look-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio such as whether or not the look-ahead chance eye is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process such as a non-reach loss stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a predetermined display determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the predetermined display is executed and the determination ratio thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of a predetermined display and its determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final variation effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the production operation example in the case where the predetermined display and the count value display for each type are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an effect mode storage buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio of the next production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed and the determination ratio. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of setting suggestion effect and the determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of mode suggestion effect setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of mode suggestion effect and the determination ratio. It is a timing chart which shows the transition of a game state and an effect state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of setting suggestion effect and the determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific effect execution setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the specific effect is executed and the determination ratio. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of a specific effect and its determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of a special production and the determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the specific effect and the special effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation in the case of displaying an eye-catching image as a character image displayed as a specific effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (for details, (See below)), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of large winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102, the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature part 063SG)
Next, the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "063SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 8-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be given with reference to the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Game area)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG. 8-2 is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and FIG. 8-2 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 8-3 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button. 8-4 is a perspective view showing the ball striking operation handle in FIG. 8-4, and FIG. 8-4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball striking operation handle.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the game area Y of the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the feature unit 063SG of the present embodiment, the first path K1 of the flow paths into which the game balls flow down is viewed from the front. The second path K2, which is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the image display device 5 and is different from the first path K1 among the flow paths through which the game ball flows, is an image when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the center decorative frame 5c that surrounds the display device 5.

Hitting a game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path K1 is called left-handed hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path K2 is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area Y, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second path K2 may be called a right-handed path because it is a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area Y. The first route K1 and the second route K2 may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of obstacle nails in the game area Y.

In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first path K1 is guided so as to be able to enter the winning ball device 6A, while the game ball flowing down the second path K2 has a passing gate 41 and a variable winning ball device. It is designed to be guided so as to be able to enter 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down the second path K2 may be able to enter the winning ball device 6A.

Further, an movable movable body 32 that can operate is provided above the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position located substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 ( (See FIG. 8-29 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 can move the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at a predetermined timing during the variable display period or the jackpot game state.

(Operation unit 600)
As shown in FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally configured as the operation unit 600. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the stick controller 31A includes a base body 601 mainly made of a metal material, gripping members 602L and 602R that cover the base body 601 from the left and right sides, and front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It mainly has a lens cover 603 attached to the side, a back base 604 arranged on the back side of the base body 601 and a push button 31B attached to the upper part of the integrated gripping members 602L and 602R.

The base body 601 is composed of a base portion 601A and a rotating portion 601C that can rotate around a rotating shaft 601B that faces the base portion 601A in the left-right direction. The rear base 604 is provided with a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2), and connects the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2) built in the push button 31B to the effect control board 12. Wiring C, connector CN, etc. for this purpose are provided.

At the time of manufacture, the operation unit 600 is described in, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the back base 604 to the base body 601. 2. Assemble the gripping members 602L and 602R to the rotating portion 601C. 3. Assemble the lens cover 603 on the front surface of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the push button 31B on the upper part of the gripping members 602L and 602R. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

Further, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the base body 601 will be referred to as a component A1, the back base 604 will be referred to as a component A2, the lens cover 603 will be referred to as a component A3, the push button 31B will be referred to as a component A4, and the gripping members 602L and 602R will be referred to as a component A5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts A1 to A5, the part A5 (grip members 602L, 602R) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts A1 to A4. The "characteristic component" is a component that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a component that constitutes the stick controller 31A that constitutes a part of the operation unit 600.

Specifically, the parts A5 (grip members 602L, 602R) are described in A.I. Being a member operated (grasping) by the player, B. The shape is such that it is easy to recall that it is a grip portion. It is larger than the other parts A1 to A4 (the area occupied by the entire operation unit 600 is large). Since it is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, C, D, etc.) that it is a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player, in this feature unit 063SG, the stick controller Among the parts of 31A, the characteristic parts will be described as parts A5 (grip members 602L, 602R).

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), the stick controller 31A configured in this way grips the grip portion composed of the grip members 602L, 602R and the lens cover 603 and pulls it toward the front side. The operation (operation) by the player is detected by the sensor unit 35A.

(Push button 31B)
As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B is assembled below the base member 651 and the base member 651, and is arranged below the sensor substrate 652 provided with the push sensor 35B and the base member 651. It is mainly composed of a vibrated member 653 that vibrates by a vibration motor (not shown), a holding member 654 that holds the vibrated member 653, and a transparent cover member 655 that covers the upper part of the holding member 654.

At the time of manufacture, the push button 31B is, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the sensor board 652 to the base member 651. 2. Assemble the sensor board 652 to the base member 651. 3. Assemble the vibrated member 653 to the holding member 654. 5. Assemble to the holding member 654 to which the vibrated member 653 is attached to the base member 651. It is configured by assembling the cover member 655 to the base member 651. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

Further, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 651 will be referred to as a component C1, the sensor substrate 652 will be referred to as a component C2, the vibrated member 653 will be referred to as a component C3, the holding member 654 will be referred to as a component C4, and the cover member 655 will be referred to as a component C5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts C1 to C5, the part C5 (cover member 655) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts C1 to C4. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a part constituting the push button 31B.

Specifically, the part C5 (cover member 655) is described in A.I. Being a member operated (pressed) by the player, B. The shape should be easy to recall as a button, C.I. It is larger than the other parts C1 to C4 (the area occupied by the entire push button 31B is large). Since it is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, C, D, etc.) of being a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player, the push button is used in the feature unit 063SG. A characteristic component among the components of 31B will be described as component C5 (cover member 655).

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B configured in this way pushes the operation unit composed of the cover member 655, and the push sensor 35B detects the operation (operation) by the player. It has become like.

(Striking operation handle 30)
As shown in FIG. 8-4, the ball striking operation handle 30 is composed of a handle base 720 attached to the game machine frame 3 by screws (not shown) and various members attached to the front side of the handle base 720. .. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the handle base 720 is composed of a tubular portion 720a and a dish-shaped flange portion 720b whose diameter is expanded from the front end portion of the tubular portion 720a. At the center of the tubular portion 720a, an insertion passage 721 through which the handle shaft 726 is inserted from the front side via the handle collar 727 is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Fixing bosses 722 and 723 for fixing the handle cover 735 are projected from the upper portion and the lower portion of the flange portion 720b. The front-rear position of the handle shaft 726 with respect to the insertion passage 721 is determined by the E-ring 726a ringed on the outer circumference.

On the left side of the front surface of the flange portion 720b, a single-shot switch lever 724 having an operation portion 724b operated when launching game balls one by one is provided, and a screw 724a is provided so that the operation portion 724b is arranged outside the flange portion 720b. A single-shot switch 725 for detecting the single-shot switch lever 724 is attached by a screw 725a in the vicinity of the single-shot switch lever 724.

An annular touch ring 728 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the flange portion 720b by a screw 728a, and an annular touch mounting plate 729 is attached to the front surface of the touch ring 728 by a screw 729a. Is fixed to the handle base 720. On the front side of the touch mounting plate 729, a handle ring 730 rotated by the player is assembled so as to be rotatable relative to the touch mounting plate 729. The touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), and the single-shot switch 725 are connected to the main board 11 via the payout control board (not shown) by the wiring C, the connector CN, or the like.

The handle ring 730 is formed with a fitting hole 732 in which the tip of the handle shaft 726 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to the center, and an arc-shaped insertion groove through which the fixing boss 722 is inserted is formed around the fitting hole 732. An arc-shaped insertion groove 733b through which the 733a and the fixing boss 723 are inserted is formed, and the fixing boss 722 is inserted into the insertion groove 733a and the fixing boss 723 is inserted into the insertion groove 733b by touch mounting. It is arranged in front of the plate 729.

The handle cover 735 arranged on the front side of the handle ring 730 is decorated with decorations (for example, a model-specific pattern, mark, character, title, manufacturer's logo, etc.) not shown on the front surface of the handle base 720. It is fixed to the fixing boss 722,723 by the screw 731a inserted into the fixing boss 722 and the screw 731b inserted into the fixing boss 723 from the back side of the flange portion 720b. Therefore, the handle ring 730 is rotatably mounted around the handle shaft 726 facing in the front-rear direction within a rotation range of about 90 degrees with respect to the touch mounting plate 729. Further, the handle ring 730 is always urged in the counterclockwise rotation direction by the handle spring 734 interposed between the handle cover 735 and the handle ring 730.

At the time of manufacture, the ball striking operation handle 30 is, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the touch ring 728 to the handle base 720. Assemble the touch mounting plate 729, 3. 3. Assemble the handle ring 730 with the handle shaft 726 integrated. It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the handle cover 735. The assembling step is optional, and may be assembled by a step other than the above. Further, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the handle base 720 and the touch ring 728 are part B1, the touch mounting plate 729 is part B2, the handle ring 730 is part B3, and the handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726 is part B4. It may be explained as. Further, among these parts B1 to B4, the part B4 (handle cover 735 with the handle shaft 726 integrated) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts B1 to B4. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a part that constitutes a part of the ball striking operation handle 30.

Specifically, the part B4 (handle cover 735) is described in A.I. Being a member operated by the player, B. The shape should be easy to recall that it is an operation unit. It is larger than the other parts B1 to B4 (the area occupied by the entire ball striking handle 30 is large), and D.I. In the present embodiment, the part of the ball striking operation handle 30 is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, here, conditions C, D, etc.) of being a part that is arranged in a prominent position to the player. The characteristic component will be described as component B4 (handle cover 735).

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the ball striking operation handle 30 configured in this way, the handle shaft 726 is rotated by rotating the handle ring 730 clockwise against the urging force of the handle spring 734. By transmitting the amount of rotation to a launching device (not shown), the game ball set at the firing position is launched (launched) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation.

In the feature unit 063SG, the jackpot type determination table is stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B".

The jackpot types include "probability jackpot A" and "probability jackpot B", in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the high-accuracy high-base state, and after the end of the jackpot game state. In, only the time saving control is executed and the "non-probability variable jackpot" is set to shift to the low-probability high-base state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the special figure game is executed the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is played.

Further, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot A" The allocation of the judgment value for the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in a predetermined range (for example, the value in the range of "71" to "100") is the "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" and the normal open jackpot state with a small number of rounds is controlled. In a gaming state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a big hit state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating. It has become like.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, Since it is a value in the range of "1" to "51"), the probability of a non-probability jackpot and the probability of a probabilistic jackpot are determined by the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is the same regardless of whether it exists.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the judgment value for the "probability change jackpot B" is different depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, the "probability change jackpot A" The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability change jackpot A" with many rounds, the special figure game of the second special figure Is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure. That is, the second special figure game is considered to be more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". You may. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller determination value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B". Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

In this way, in this feature unit 063SG, in the normal state (low base state) which is not the time saving state (high base state), even if the game ball flows down the second path K2 by right-handed hitting, the game ball enters the second start winning opening. Because it is difficult for the player to enter, it is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first start winning opening by hitting left, while in the time saving state (high base state) or the big hit game state, the game ball is hit by right. If the second path K2 is flowed down, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, which is more advantageous for the player than having the game ball win the first starting winning opening by hitting left.

FIG. 8-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 063SG. In this feature unit 063SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although the feature unit 063SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 063SG is shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. It is set. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 063SG, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 063SG, as described above, the variable display result is set to be a "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and super In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the variable display time, the higher the expectation of becoming a "big hit".

Further, in this feature unit 063SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 063SG. In this feature unit 063SG, the variation pattern to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-6, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present feature unit 063SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 2 or less, the variable pattern determination table A for losing is selected, and the variable display result is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss.

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for use.

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use.

If the variable display result is "missing" in the time saving state (high base state), select the losing variation pattern determination table D, and use the loss variation pattern determination table D to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach loss).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 063SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

FIG. 8-7 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 7. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the launch operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 after the look-ahead advance notice setting process of 063SGS161, and then processes any one of 063SGS170 to 063SGS175 according to the value of the effect process flag. I do. In this feature unit 063SG, the small hit middle effect process of S174 and the small hit end effect process of S175 shown in FIG. 7 are omitted, and the big hit medium effect process of S176 and the ending effect process of S177 are changed to 063SGS174 and 063SGS175, respectively. Move up. Further, the content of the launch operation promotion effect processing will be described later.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (063SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (063SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown). The various command data and various flags stored in association with "" are shifted upward by one buffer number (063SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 063SGS271 (063SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (063SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer received at the time of winning (not shown), one buffer number It shifts upward by the minute (063SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 063SGS272 or 063SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (063SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (063SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 063SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Loss pattern) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the processing of 063SGS276, in 063SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is the SP reach fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. When the fluctuation pattern is not the SP reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command is selected (063SGS278).

On the other hand, when it is determined in 063SGS277 that the fluctuation pattern is the SP reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect pattern determination process for determining the operation promotion effect type (063SGS279). Here, the operation promotion effect will be described.

(Operation promotion production)
In the feature unit 063SG, when the super reach fluctuation pattern PA2-2 or PB1-2 is determined in the fluctuation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach effect during the variable display. At the same time, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is enabled at a predetermined timing during the execution of the super reach effect, and the player performs an operation in which the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be detected during the operation valid period. It urges the player to do so, that is, it executes an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to the player, and when there is an operation, the variable display result is notified. There is.

In the following, the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the super reach effect will be described. 8-13 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the start of the super reach effect in FIGS. 8-13. 8-14 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect in FIGS. 8-14. 8-15 are diagrams (A) to (R) for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect. 8-16 are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the parts assembly effect in FIGS. 8-16. 8-17 are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern A or C in FIGS. 8-17. 8-18 are diagrams for explaining an example of the controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D in FIGS. 8-18. 8-19 are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation promotion effect in FIGS. 8-19.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), and then the decorative symbol is variable as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). After setting the display mode to a predetermined reach mode, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), the super reach effect is started with the development of the super reach. In this feature unit 063SG, as a super reach effect, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is executed. In the feature unit 063SG, a battle effect is executed as a super reach effect, but an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B at the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the battle effect, and effectively detects the operation during this operation valid period. An operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of the operation target (stick controller 31A or push button 31B) is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the operation promotion effect is to display a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, or FIG. As shown in B), this is performed by displaying the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!" On the image display device 5. Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may output "close!" Or "press!" Voices, sound effects, and the like.

Next, the timing at which the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, that is, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected. The result of the battle effect is notified at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without inputting the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (C) and 8-19 (D), it is notified that the ally character wins the enemy character and the variable display result is a big hit, while it is variable. When the display result is lost, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and 8-19 (F), if the player is defeated, it is notified that the variable display result is lost.

That is, the operation promotion effect is executed at the final stage of the super reach effect, at the timing of notifying whether or not the variable display result is a big hit, during the operation valid period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid. It is said to be a production. In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, after notifying that the battle effect has been defeated, the relief effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Controller assembly production)
Further, in the feature unit 063SG, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses a controller image Z1 or a push that imitates the stick controller 31A as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) or 8-19 (B). Before displaying the push button image Z3 imitating the button 31B, that is, before the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, the controller assembly effect of assembling the stick controller 31A can be executed. Then, when the assembly is successful (completed), the controller image Z1 prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed at a high rate, and when the assembly fails (not completed), the push prompting the operation of the push button 31B is performed. Button image Z3 is displayed at a high rate.

As described with reference to FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A is composed of a plurality of parts (members), and in the controller assembly effect, each of the five parts A1 to A5 of the plurality of parts is supported. The parts images ZA1 to ZA5 are assembled in order, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), any of four effect patterns A to D having different assembly orders and assembly results can be executed. It is said that.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to 8-17, the effect pattern A displays the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1 and then displays the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A5 on the component image ZA1. It is displayed in the mode of assembling ZA5, displayed in the mode of assembling the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 to the part image ZA1, and displayed in the mode of assembling the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 to the part image ZA1. Then, by displaying the part image ZA1 corresponding to the part A4 in the manner of assembling the part image ZA4, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed. In other words, it is a pattern in which assembly is successful (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (G), the effect pattern B is an embodiment in which the component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1 is displayed and then the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 is assembled to the component image ZA1. Is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 to the part image ZA1, and is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 to the part image ZA1. By displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 in the form of assembling, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed, that is, the assembly is successful. It is a pattern to be (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to (E) and (G), the effect pattern C has the same assembly order as the effect pattern A, but the component image ZA1 shows the component corresponding to the component A4. After displaying in the mode of assembling the image ZA4, the unfinished image ZA7 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed is finally displayed, that is, the pattern in which the assembly fails (not completed). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (F) and (H), the effect pattern D has the same assembly order as the effect pattern B, but the component image ZA1 shows the component corresponding to the component A5. After displaying the image ZA5 in the assembling mode, the unfinished image ZA7 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed is finally displayed, that is, the pattern in which the assembly fails (not completed). Is.

Further, the assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in these effect patterns A to D is shown in FIG. 8-2 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the stick controller 31A is being assembled. Since the order is different from the actual assembly order in the described manufacturing process, the effect of production can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the effect patterns A to D may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 (rear base 604) includes the wiring C, the connector CN, the controller sensor unit 35A, and the push of the actual rear base 604. Since the display of the component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 is impaired by the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the wiring C and the connector CN. Can be suppressed. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the effect pattern B, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order, and as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (E), (F), and (G), the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are more characteristic than the components A1 to A4. By displaying the component image ZA5 corresponding to the component A5 in a manner of assembling after the component images ZA1 to ZA4, the stick controller 31A can be suitably noticed and the stick controller 31A is most recognized. By displaying the easy-to-use part image ZA5 at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end, which improves the interest.

Further, the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZA1 to ZA4. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility by the player is higher than that of the other part images ZA1 to ZA4 is, for example, a mode in which the part image ZA5 is assembled to the part image ZA1 as shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). When displaying with, the part image ZA5 is enlarged and highlighted, the effect image is displayed around the part image ZA5 to highlight it, or the image display device 5 is moved from the periphery to the center of the display area. It includes an aspect in which the player can easily identify the part as compared with other part images ZA1 to ZA4. And by displaying in this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the controller assembly effect, the effect patterns A and B for displaying the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the form of assembling the component image ZA1 and the component image ZA5 are assembled on the component image ZA1. When the effect patterns A and B that include the effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 and finally display the completed controller image Z1 are determined by displaying in a mode that is not attached. It is a big hit at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D that do not display the finally completed controller image Z1. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to succeed (complete) the assembly production, which improves the interest.

Further, even if the variable display result is a big hit, the push button 31B may be determined as the operation target, or the effect patterns A and C in which the characteristic component A4 is not assembled at the end are selected. Or, since the production patterns C and D that are not completed due to the failure of the assembly may be selected in the end, the player's expectation for the big hit can be maintained regardless of which production pattern is selected. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 063SG, a mode in which one of the effect patterns A to D is selected as the effect pattern of the controller assembly effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of parts, the number of parts, and the like. It may be possible to select one from a plurality of effect patterns including other effect patterns having different component types, component assembly orders, and the like.

In the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid based on the variable display result, and executes the controller assembly effect. Whether or not to execute, and when executing, which of the effect patterns A to D is executed is determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has an operation unit (operation) that enables the operation when the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (when the variable display result is a jackpot). As a target), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the push button 31B is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is a loss fluctuation pattern (when the variable display result is a loss), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 20% as the operation unit (operation target) for enabling the operation, and the push button 31B is used. Is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective at the end of the battle effect, the jack controller 31A becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective, so that the stick controller 31A is more reliable than the push button 31B. The degree is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the non-execution of the controller assembly effect at a rate of 5%, and determines the effect pattern A. It is determined at a rate of 25%, the effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 60%, and the effect patterns C and D are determined at a rate of 5% each. On the other hand, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect patterns A and B are determined at a rate of 5% each, and the effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%. It is determined by the ratio, and the effect pattern D is determined by the ratio of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores in the RAM 122 the type of the determined operation target, the presence / absence of execution of the controller assembly effect, and the type of the effect patterns A to D determined when the controller assembly effect is executed. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is executed at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect is not executed, and the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling fail to assemble. While the effect patterns C and D are determined at a higher rate, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the controller assembly effect is not executed at a higher rate than when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A. At the same time, even when the execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, the effect patterns C and D that fail to assemble are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling.

Therefore, if the controller assembly effect is executed and the assembly is successful, the jackpot will be higher than when the controller assembly effect is not executed or the assembly fails. In addition, when the controller assembly effect is not executed, the loss occurs at a higher rate than when the assembly is successful. That is, the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling have higher jackpot reliability than the effect patterns C and D that fail in assembly. Further, the effect pattern B that succeeds in assembling has a higher jackpot reliability than the effect pattern A that succeeds in assembling, and the effect pattern C that fails in assembly has a lower jackpot reliability than the effect pattern D that fails in assembly. Therefore, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher in the order of the effect pattern B, the effect pattern A, the effect pattern D, and the effect pattern C. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is assembled when the variable display result is a big hit, the stick controller 31A is selected as the operation target at a higher ratio than the push button 31B, and the operation target is the stick controller 31A. Since the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembling are selected at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D that fail to assemble, if the controller assembly effect is successful and the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective, a big hit is obtained at a high rate. ..

Further, in the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B), the operation promotion notification is sent by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 at the start timing of the operation valid period. By performing the controller assembly effect before the operation promotion notification is performed, that is, before the operation valid period is started, the stick controller 31A for performing the operation can be focused on the player. Therefore, it is possible to notify in advance that the operation valid period will be started to a player or the like who has little experience in playing a game. Further, instead of displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B) over a predetermined period, the start timing of the operation valid period is determined by using the controller assembly effect. Since it becomes possible to raise awareness, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

When the non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, the controller assembly effect is not started even at the start timing of the controller assembly effect, and then FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8- By displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 as shown in 19 (B), the operation promotion notification is performed.

Further, the feature unit 063SG exemplifies a mode in which non-execution of the controller assembly effect may be determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA1 to the present invention are not limited to this. Although ZA5 is displayed, it may be possible to select an effect pattern that does not display the mode in which these component images ZA1 to ZA5 are assembled, that is, displays the mode in which they are not assembled.

Further, after displaying the button component images corresponding to the components constituting the push button 31B, after starting the push button assembly effect of displaying the button component images in the form of assembling, the push button is pushed before or after the assembly is completed. By displaying the button image Z3 in a disassembled manner, it may have an effect pattern in which assembly fails.

Further, it may have an effect pattern in which the controller assembly effect is started and the assembly is successful to display the controller image Z1 after displaying the push button image Z3 in a disassembled manner.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (F) and 8-18 (G), after displaying the mode in which the final component images ZA4 and ZA5 are assembled, the assembled controller image Z1 is used for the game machine. The mode of assembling to the glass door frame or the like of the frame 3 may be displayed.

(Parts assembly production)
In the feature unit 063SG, the effect control CPU 120 displays a related effect image related to the effect image (controller image Z1 and push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect before starting the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. After displaying in stages, either the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) or the promotion effect of the second aspect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) It is possible to execute a component assembly effect that makes it possible to specify whether or not it will be executed.

The stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, and thus the stick controller 31A is configured in the parts assembly effect. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 among the plurality of parts and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to each of the five parts C1 to C5 among the plurality of parts constituting the push button 31B are As related effect images related to the effect images (controller image Z1 and push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect, they are displayed step by step one by one during the execution period of the battle effect.

Then, when all or a part of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A is displayed in the component assembly effect, there is a high possibility that the operation of the stick controller 31A will be promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. It is suggested that when all or a part of the part images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B is displayed, it is highly likely that the operation of the push button 31B is promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. To. That is, in the parts assembly effect executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, the operation is promoted by the operation promotion effect by displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 in stages. The unit suggests (becomes identifiable) whether the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the battle effect image Z50 in the display area of the image display device 5, the battle effect image Z50 in the display area is displayed. In the specific display area Z51 above the above, a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed one by one in order.

When displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, first of all, which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B is displayed. After displaying in a difficult-to-identify mode, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B are changed to an identifiable mode. After that, the display mode is maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and 8-11, specifically, both the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B are displayed. The display mode changes in a plurality of stages (for example, four stages) according to the passage of time from the start of.

Each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters such as "?" Are displayed. The common silhouette mode is a mode that is commonly used when displaying a component image of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

In the third stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in a black individual silhouette embodiment. The individual silhouette mode is a non-common mode that is used individually when displaying the component image of the stick controller 31A and when displaying the component image of the push button 31B.

In the fourth stage, it is displayed in an icon mode representing the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B itself. In the fourth stage, parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in white, and parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in different colors (for example, red), and a flame is emitted around them. It is possible to display a special mode for displaying the effect image shown.

When the effect control CPU 120 displays each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in order, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of each component image in the order of the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. .. For example, the display mode of the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage may be gradually changed to the display modes of the part images of the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage by using the moving image display. Then, after displaying the parts images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage, the parts images of the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage are switched (updated) every time a predetermined time elapses. The aspect may be changed.

As described above, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 identify the silhouette mode, that is, whether the player is the component image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Is displayed in a difficult identification mode, and in the fourth stage, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear mode, that is, whether the player is a part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is displayed in an identifiable manner that can be identified. Therefore, from the start of displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, the player cannot predict which part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed. Can attract interest in whether the part image of is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as specific effect images are the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second aspect. As a mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is executed, the component images of the first to third stages are targeted, but the third stage As for the component image, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B may be compared to each other so that they can be identified.

Here, to explain an example of the component assembly effect that displays the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first starts the battle effect. A horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed on the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a component image ZC1 is displayed on the left side of the specific display area Z51 in a common silhouette mode of a black circle. Display with (1st stage). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), the part image ZC1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-14 (C). After displaying the part image ZC1 in the individual silhouette mode (third stage), the part image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode as shown in FIG. 8-14 (D) (fourth stage).

Further, when the part image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC2 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (D) to (G)). Further, when the part image ZC2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC3 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (G) to (J)). Further, when the part image ZC3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC4 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (J) to (M)). Further, when the part image ZC4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZC5 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (M)-(Q)).

As shown in FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q), the last part image ZC5 is displayed in a common silhouette mode of a black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed in the same manner as the part image ZC1. When changing from the 1st stage to the 4th stage, by highlighting such as blinking around the part image ZC5, it changes to the 4th stage and creates an effect that fuels whether or not the assembly is successful. You may.

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the number of component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes. As the number increases, the display mode of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes stepwise. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (Q), when the component image ZC5 is displayed in the icon mode, all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed, and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, in FIGS. 8-14 (J) (K), after the part image ZC4 is displayed in the silhouette mode, the part image ZC4 disappears while changing to the individual silhouette mode, so that the part images ZC4 and ZC5 May not be displayed and the assembly of parts may fail.

Further, explaining the component set effect for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first has a predetermined time after the battle effect is started. A horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the part image ZA1 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode on the left side of the specific display area Z51. (First stage). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), the part image ZA1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C). After displaying the part image ZA1 in the individual silhouette mode (third stage), the part image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode as shown in FIG. 8-15 (D) (fourth stage).

Further, when the part image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA2 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (D) to (G)). Further, when the part image ZA2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA3 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Figs. 8-15 (G) to (J)). Further, when the part image ZA3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA4 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (J) to (M)). Further, when the part image ZA4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next part image ZA5 is displayed in the common silhouette mode of the black circle (first stage), and the display mode is displayed from the first stage in the same manner as the part image ZA1. It is changed up to the 4th stage (Figs. 8-15 (M) to (Q)).

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes. As the number increases, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes stepwise. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (Q), when the part image ZA5 is displayed in the icon mode, all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed, and the assembly of the parts is successful. On the other hand, for example, in FIGS. 8-15 (J) and 8-15 (K), after the part image ZA4 is displayed in the silhouette mode, the part image ZA4 disappears while changing to the individual silhouette mode, so that the part images ZA4 and ZA5 May not be displayed and the assembly of parts may fail.

In the present embodiment, when the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise, one part image is displayed and changed from the first stage to the fourth stage, and then another. Although the form of displaying the component images in order has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after displaying one component image, it is possible to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. While changing to the second stage or the third stage where it is difficult, other part images are changed to the second stage or the third stage in the same way, and it is displayed at the timing when a predetermined number of part images are displayed. The display mode of at least a part of the plurality of component images may be changed up to the fourth stage. By doing so, it is not possible to know which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is displayed until a predetermined number of component images are displayed, so that the player's interest can be maintained. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the embodiment in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display is performed in a display area other than the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a sub-image display device provided separately from the image display device 5). May be good.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 performs the component set effect on a plurality of effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-1 and PT2-1 having different changes in the type of the component image and the display mode of the component image. It is feasible based on any of ~ 3.

The effect pattern PT1-1 gradually changes in the order of the common silhouette, the individual silhouette, and the icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC3 of the push button 31B, but finally the part images ZC4 and 5 are not displayed and are assembled. Is a pattern that fails. The effect pattern PT1-2 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It is a pattern. The effect pattern PT1-3 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon (effect mode) for the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed. This is a pattern in which the set is successful.

The effect pattern PT2-1 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the component images ZA1 to ZA3 of the stick controller 31A, but finally the component images ZA4 and ZA5 are not displayed and are assembled. Is a pattern that fails. The effect pattern PT2-2 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It is a pattern. The effect pattern PT2-3 changes stepwise in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon (effect mode) for the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed. This is a pattern in which the set is successful.

After finishing the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines the component set effect pattern in the 063SGS280 based on the determination result in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process. Perform decision processing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is the operation target of the operation promotion effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279. Depending on the height, one of a plurality of component assembly effect patterns is determined.

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 3%. , The effect pattern PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, the effect pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 7%, the effect pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the effect pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 30. It is determined at a rate of%, and the effect pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 40%.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the effect pattern is determined. PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, effect pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, effect pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 7%, and effect pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. The production pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the component set effect, the component set effect execution decision flag is set, and the types of the determined effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 are stored in the RAM 122. The determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed on the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is determined at a higher ratio than the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 for displaying the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the above. The effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 for displaying the corresponding component images ZC1 to ZC5 are determined at a higher ratio than the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 for displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A. To do.

In this way, in the component assembly effect, which of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 is the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect, that is, the operation target in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. This is an effect suggesting which one is used by gradually displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3.

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, it is highly possible that the execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, so that all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed. The effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 in which the set is successful are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns PT2-1 in which the set fails. That is, when the component set effect of the set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the operation is performed at a higher rate than when the component set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. In the promotion effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect.

Further, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2- that succeed in the set. Since it is determined at a higher rate than 2, 2-3, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to set is executed, the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. There is a high possibility that

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the variable display result is likely to be a big hit. Therefore, the effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, When the execution rate increases in the order of PT2-2 and PT2-3 and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, there is a high possibility that the variable display result is lost, so the effect pattern PT2-3 , PT2-2, PT2-1, PT1-3, PT1-2, PT1-1 in that order. Therefore, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is set to increase in the order of the effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the parts assembly effect is determined to be executed at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is determined, but the push button 31B is determined. Is determined, the variable display result is lost, or the execution of the controller assembly effect is not determined.

Further, in the feature unit 063SG, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (specific effect image) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is the specific display mode (all in the specific display area Z51). When the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed (the display mode of the set success) is changed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the specific display mode is not obtained. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (specific effect images) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is defined. It is sufficient that the operation of the stick controller 31A can be promoted in the operation promotion effect when the specific display mode is adopted. For example, when the specific display mode is adopted, the operation is promoted at a higher rate than that of the push button 31B. It may be set so that the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the production.

Returning to FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the component set effect execution flag is set after executing the component set effect pattern determination process on the 063SGS280 (063SGS281). When the parts set effect execution flag is set, the time until the start of the parts set effect is set in the parts set effect start waiting timer (063SGS282), the parts set effect execution decision flag is set, and the parts set effect execution flag is set. Is cleared (063SGS283). If the parts set effect execution flag is not set in 063SGS281, the process proceeds to 063SGS284 as it is. Then, the effect control pattern (process table) according to the content determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process is selected (063SGS284), and the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (063SGS285).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (063SGS286). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (063SGS287). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (063SGS288). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (063SGS289).

FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (063SGS301, 063SGS302,063SGS303). In the effect control CPU 120, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect), or the flag for executing the advance notice effect is set (during the execution of the advance notice effect). If there is), the advance notice effect processing may be executed.

In 063SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (063SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (063SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (063SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (063SGS309b).

Next, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 promotes the operation based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. A process for executing the effect is performed (063SGS310). Further, when the execution of the parts set effect is determined in the parts set effect pattern determination process of 063SGS280, the process of executing the parts set effect based on the determined effect pattern is performed at the execution timing of the parts set effect ( 063SGS310a). Further, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the operation promotion effect is executed based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. (063SGS310).

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (063SGS311). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (063SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbols). The image data of the screen to be used) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (063SGS312). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (063SGS313).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (063SGS311; N), after executing 063SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (063SGS314). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (063SGS315; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure. The value is updated according to (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the processing of 063SGS306 timers out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table is performed. finish.

(Launch operation promotion production)
The effect control CPU 120 launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 when the big hit game state or the time saving state is started in the launch operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 shown in FIG. 8-7. The launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B that encourage the user to do so are executed. In addition, when the time saving state ends and the game is controlled to the normal game state (low accuracy low base state), a left-handed notification is issued to urge the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. Execute.

An example of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the jackpot game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21. FIG. 8-20 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the effect in the jackpot game state. FIG. 8-21 is a diagram illustrating a flow of production from the start of the jackpot game state to the control to the normal game state via the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit (for example, a non-probable variable big hit) in the normal gaming state (or the time saving state) (see FIG. 8-21 (A)), for effect control. The CPU 120 starts the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) at the timing Ta0 when it receives the effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state in the special figure hit wait process of 063SGS173 shown in FIG. 8-7. In the fanfare period (execution period of the jackpot opening preprocessing) from the timing Ta0 when the effect control command is received to the timing Ta2 when the round game is started, first, the jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed, and then the jackpot starts. At the timing Ta1 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the start effect, the launch operation promotion effect A for prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path K2 is started (see FIG. 8-22). ).

In the launch operation promotion effect A, after executing the handle assembly effect described later, a right-handed notification indicating that the right-handed operation is performed from the timing Ta2 when the handle assembly effect ends to the timing Ta3 when the round game starts. I do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit middle effect (round effect) during the round game period (execution period of the big hit opening process) from the timing Ta2 when the fanfare period ends to the timing Ta4 when the round game ends (the big hit opening process). See FIG. 8-21 (B)). Then, in the ending period (execution period of the processing after opening the big hit) from the timing Ta4 at which the round game period ends to the timing Ta7 at which the big hit game state ends, first, the big hit ends and the time is shortened (chance time). After executing the jackpot end effect indicating that effect (see FIG. 8-21 (C)), the game ball flows down the second path K2 at the timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the effect during the round. The firing operation promotion effect B for prompting the firing of the game ball is started (see FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24).

In the launch operation promotion effect B, after executing the route assembly effect described later, a right-handed notification indicating that the right-handed operation is performed from the timing Ta6 at which the route assembly effect ends to the timing Ta7 at which the jackpot game state ends. I do.

In addition, the time saving state (low accuracy high base) from the timing Ta7 controlled to the low accuracy high base state after the big hit game state ends to the timing Ta8 in which the variable display is executed 100 times without a new big hit occurring. In the state), the effect image Z10 corresponding to the time saving state, the variable display image Z11 of the decorative pattern, the remaining fluctuation number image Z12 in the time saving state, and the notification image Z13 consisting of "right-handed" and "→" indicating right-handed. And are displayed (see FIG. 8-21 (D)).

After displaying the notification image Z14 indicating that the time saving state has ended at the timing Ta8 at which the 100th variable display has ended since the end of the jackpot game state (see FIG. 8-21 (E)), a predetermined period starts from the timing Ta8. Until the elapsed timing Ta9, "Please return to left-handed", "←" and the ball-hit operation handle that prompt the game ball to be launched (returned to left-handed) so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. In addition to displaying the notification image Z15 composed of the steering wheel image imitating 30, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is performed by outputting the sound "Please return to left-handed" from the speakers 8L and 8R (Fig.). 8-21 (F)).

In this feature unit 063SG, the case where the non-probability change jackpot is controlled to the low probability high base state is described, but even when the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B is controlled to the high probability high base state. , The launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the big hit, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the big hit, but even if the 100th variable display ends without the big hit occurring from the end of the big hit game state. Since the high accuracy and high base state continues, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is not performed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 performs left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect), the steering wheel assembly effect described later is not executed.

(Handle assembly production)
Next, the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-22. 8-22 are views for explaining the flow of the steering wheel assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect A, and FIGS. 8-22 are diagrams showing a right-handed notification.

As described in FIG. 8-4, the ball striking operation handle 30 is composed of a plurality of parts (members), and in the handle assembly effect, each of the four parts B1 to B4 of the plurality of parts is supported. Parts images to be displayed ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in an assembling mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to 8-22 (E), the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 is assembled to the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the glass door frame of the gaming machine frame 3. After displaying in the aspect, the component image ZB1 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZB2 corresponding to the part B2, and the part image ZB1 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZB3 corresponding to the part B3. By displaying the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 on the image ZB1, the completed image ZB5 of the ball striking operation handle 30 in which all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally displayed is displayed. is there.

In the right-handed notification, the handle image Z17 that rotates the hitting ball operation handle 30 to the right and the right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow on which the character information "right-handed!" Is displayed are displayed, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the voice "Please hit right". The effect control CPU 120 displays the right arrow image Z5 that prompts the right strike during the execution of the steering wheel assembly effect and the right strike notification.

Further, the assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the handle assembly effect is described with reference to FIG. 8-4 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the ball striking operation handle 30 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, the effect of production can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the handle assembly effect may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the ball striking operation handle 30. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the component image ZB1 corresponding to the component B1 (handle base 720) includes the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, and the handle sensor (not shown) of the actual handle base 720. Since the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the single-shot switch 725 is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 is impaired by the component image corresponding to the component such as the wiring C and the connector CN. Can be suppressed. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the handle assembly effect, the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4, which is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3, is displayed in a manner of assembling after the part images ZB1 to ZB3, which is suitable for the ball striking operation handle 30. By displaying the part image ZB4, which is the easiest to recognize that it is the hitting ball operation handle 30, at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. Is improved.

Further, the part image ZB4 may be displayed in a form having higher visibility by the player than the other part images ZB1 to ZB3. Specifically, a mode in which the visibility by the player is higher than that of the other part images ZB1 to ZB3 is, for example, when the part image ZB4 is displayed in a mode of assembling, the part image ZB4 may be enlarged and displayed, or the parts may be displayed. The player can highlight the effect image by displaying it around the image ZB4, move it from the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center, and display the effect image more than other component images ZB1 to ZB3. Includes aspects that make it easy to identify parts. And by displaying in this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the handle assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are assembled to the door frame image Z16 by a procedure other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner of assembling the part images ZB1 to ZB4 to the door frame image Z16 in the above order. The effect pattern to be displayed in the mode may be included.

Further, also in the handle assembly effect, after all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are not used and the assembly fails and the unfinished image of the ball striking operation handle 30 is displayed, the assembly is started again and the completed image ZB5 is displayed. You may try to do it.

(Route assembly production)
Next, the route assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-23. 8-23 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the route assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect B in FIGS. 8-23. 8-24 are diagrams in which (G) to (K) explain the flow of the flow effect of the game ball in the launch operation promotion effect B, and FIGS. 8-24 are diagrams showing the right-handed notification.

As described in FIG. 8-1, the second path K2 is configured by arranging a plurality of parts (members) on the game board 2 and the game board 2, and in the route assembly effect, these game boards The component images ZD1 to ZD4 corresponding to each of the four parts D1 to D4 out of the plurality of parts including 2 are displayed in a manner of being assembled to the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2. In the following, the parts that make up the special variable winning ball device 7 are part D1, the parts that make up the variable winning ball device 6B are part D2, the parts that make up the passage gate 41 are part D3, and a part of the second path K2. The passage component (passage member) to be formed will be referred to as a component D4 and will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to 8-23 (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 in a manner of assembling to the game board image Z20. The part image ZD2 corresponding to the part D2 is displayed on the game board image Z20 in the form of assembling, the part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is attached to the game board image Z20, and the part is displayed on the game board image Z20. By displaying the component image ZD4 corresponding to D4 in an assembled manner, at least a part of the path image corresponding to the second path K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the component images ZD1 to ZD4) is finally used. It is an effect to display the route image).

In addition, the assembly order of the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in these path assembly effects is the actual assembly in the manufacturing process in order to clearly indicate to the player that the second path K2 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in the route assembly effect may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the part D4 {passage part (passage member)} is actually formed integrally with the center decorative frame 5c, but in the route assembly effect, the part is formed separately from the center decorative frame 5c. By displaying it as the image ZD4, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are images that do not include some of the plurality of components (members) constituting the second path K2. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 (special variable winning ball device 7), the component image ZD2 corresponding to the component D2 (variable winning ball device 6B), and the component D3 (passing gate 41). ) Corresponding to the component image ZD3, since the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the solenoid, the switch, the wiring, and the connector of each component is actually omitted (not displayed), the component images ZD1 to It is possible to prevent the appearance of the ZD4 from being spoiled by component images corresponding to components such as solenoids, switches, wirings, and connectors. The display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Further, in the route assembly effect, the component image ZC4 corresponding to the component D4, which is more characteristic than the components D1 to D3, is displayed in a manner of assembling after the component images ZD1 to ZD3, which is suitable for the second path K2. The part image ZD4, which is the easiest to recognize that it is the second path K2, is displayed at the end, which makes it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. Is improved. The "characteristic part" is a part that is most easily recognized (specified) by the player as a passage part (passage member) that constitutes a part of the second path K2.

Specifically, the part D4 (passage member) is described in A.I. Being a member constituting the path through which the game ball flows down, B. The shape should be easy to recall that it is a route, C.I. It is larger than the other parts D1 to D3 (the area occupied by the entire second path K2 is large), and D.I. It is a part that is placed in a position that stands out to the player. Includes parts and the like that satisfy at least one condition (for example, here, conditions A, B, etc.) of being a device that the player aims to win a prize. Therefore, for example, if the player is urged to win the variable winning ball device 6B, the part image ZD2 is displayed as a characteristic part in a manner of being assembled after the part images ZD1, ZD3, and ZD4. It may be.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 including the game board 2 (game area Y) has a model-specific portion peculiar to the pachinko game machine 1, and the game board image Z20 corresponding to such a game board 2 and the game board image Z20 When the door frame image Z16 or the like corresponding to the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame is displayed in the route assembly effect or the handle assembly effect, it is preferable to omit at least a part of the model-specific portion.

The model-specific section is a game information display section that displays game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name), etc.), obstacle nails, windmills, etc. Including obstacles, movable bodies for directing, decorative parts, etc., these are provided so as to be visible to the player in the game area Y. Therefore, when these are displayed in the route assembly effect, they correspond to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the model name (title name) is the same, but the gaming performance (specs) such as the number of prize balls and the jackpot probability is different. When executing a route assembly effect on a pachinko game machine or another pachinko game machine with a different model name (title name), information different from the actual one is provided to the player, which gives a sense of discomfort. The assembly effect cannot be used in common for multiple types of pachinko machines.

However, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (E), when displaying the game information image Z21 corresponding to the game information display unit on which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, the model name (title name), etc. are displayed, the above By displaying the game information in a mode that is difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify (for example, not displaying, blurring, filling, etc.), the same route assembly effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.

Further, in the route assembly effect, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 in the above order, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 by a procedure other than the above procedure. The effect pattern to be displayed in the mode may be included.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a route assembly effect for displaying the mode of assembling the part image ZD4 to the game board image Z20, displays the character image Z22 as shown in FIG. 8-23 (F), and then displays the character image Z22. As shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to 8-24, the route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed recognizable to the player, and the route image is displayed in a mode in which the game ball flows down. Start the flow production.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (G), an image in which the game ball moves toward the right side is displayed on the upper part of the game area Y, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (H), the game area Y is displayed. An image of the game ball moving downward is displayed on the right side of the above, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (I), an image of the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 and moving toward the variable winning ball device 6B. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (J), an image in which the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B is displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognizablely notify the player that the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and can win the variable winning ball device 6B by hitting right. When displaying an image in which these game balls move, an arrow image Z6 showing the flow path of the game balls is displayed in addition to the game balls.

The game board image Z20 shown in FIG. 8-24 (G) is a movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which is originally a model-specific portion (for example, a region shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 8-24 (G)). ), But the movable body 32 is displayed in a mode that is difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify (for example, a blurred image or a deformed image of the movable body 32). Further, the display of the movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which is the model-specific part may be omitted, or only the display of the characteristic part may be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (K), after displaying the character image Z22, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), in the right-handed hit notification, the hitting ball operation handle 30 is rotated to the right. The image Z17, the right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow on which the character information "Right-handed!" Is displayed, and the character image Z25 are displayed, and the sound "Right-handed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. The effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 that prompts a right-handed strike during the route assembly effect and the right-handed strike notification.

As described above, in the launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B, it is shown that the ball striking operation handle 30 is rotated to the right as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). By displaying the steering wheel image Z17 and the right arrow image Z18, not only the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) is performed, but also before the right-handed notification is performed, that is, before the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. By performing the assembly effect and the route assembly effect, it is possible to draw attention to the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed operation to the player and the second path K2 in which the game ball flows down by right-handed hitting. It is possible to notify a player or the like who is inexperienced in advance that a right-handed operation is required. Further, instead of displaying the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) image shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L) for a predetermined period, the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect are used. Since it is possible to be aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

In addition, it is conceivable to set a long jackpot fanfare period and ending period in advance so that the player does not get a large number of balls in a short time. ) And the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L) for a long period of time, the effect will be delayed simply by displaying the same effect image continuously or repeatedly. However, by setting the execution of the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect as the launch operation promotion effect A and the launch operation promotion effect B, the right to the player and the like so that the launch operation promotion effect does not appear to be delayed. It is possible to preferably notify that the start timing of the striking operation has arrived.

In addition, by setting a long execution period of the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) without performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect, the player is fully aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation. Although it is possible, if the right-handed notification image is displayed before the start timing of the right-handed operation, the right-handed operation is started before the start timing of the right-handed operation, and the player is wasted. However, by executing the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, it becomes possible to start the right-handed operation at a suitable timing while being aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation.

(First invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the first invention shown below. That is, in a conventional game machine capable of playing a game by launching a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area. An advantageous state having a first path and a second path different from the first path, and having a game ball flowing down the second path after the end of the jackpot game state, which is more advantageous than flowing down the first path. In those controlled by (time saving state, etc.), it is possible to perform a promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the second path before the advantageous state is started. There were things. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, in the promotion effect, the effect is monotonous only by prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path, so that it is not possible to improve the interest. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A launch operation unit (for example, a ball striking handle 30) for performing a launch operation of a game medium, and
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The launch operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means includes a first component image (for example, component image ZB1) related to the first component and a second component image (for example, component image ZB4) related to the second component. Is displayed, and a specific part image (for example, the completed image ZB5) using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a handle. FIG. 8 is a portion capable of displaying the completed image ZB5 of the ball striking operation handle 30 in which all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally used by displaying the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 in the assembling effect in the assembly production. -See (A) to (E))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-22 (F), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the steering wheel assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4, that is, by displaying the unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that the right-handed operation start timing has not been reached. Finally, by displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A launch operation unit (for example, a ball striking handle 30) for performing a launch operation of a game medium, and
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The launch operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means can display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in order (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , A portion displayed in a manner in which part images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially assembled in the handle assembly effect. See FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-22 (F), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZB1 to ZB4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the right-handed operation start timing is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by finally displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The plurality of components include a third component (for example, an electronic component such as a wiring C, a connector CN, a touch ring 728, a handle sensor (not shown), and a single-shot switch 725 included in the handle base 720).
The promotion effect executing means does not display a third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the component B1 (handle base 720) in the handle assembly effect. The component image ZB1 omits the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), and the single-shot switch 725 of the actual handle base 720 (. (Not displayed) part.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The second component (for example, component B4) is a component that is more characteristic than the first component (for example, component B1).
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3 in the handle assembly effect. A part in which the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 is displayed in a manner of being assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the effect.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the hitting ball operation handle 30 has been completed, that is, that it is the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) has a model-specific part (for example, unique (specific) gaming information unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ) Etc.) is displayed, it has an obstacle such as an obstacle nail or a windmill, a movable body for directing, a decorative part, etc.)
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means may display a game area image related to the game area, and when displaying the game area image, at least a part of the model-specific portion is omitted. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2 and the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least a part of the model-specific part is omitted.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the same promotion effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same route assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on different models of game machines without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You will be able to do it.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect for prompting the game medium to be launched so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is left-handed notification based on the end of the time saving state. (See Figure 8-21 (F)),
In the special promotion effect, the first component image and the second component image are not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state. The part where the handle assembly effect is not executed before the operation. See FIG. 8-21 (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress annoyance.
Specifically, when the player is controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a time saving state), a steering wheel assembly effect or a route assembly effect is performed, while the state that is advantageous to the player is controlled to a disadvantageous state. When this is done, the player can be made aware that the game state has changed by not performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The promotion effect executing means displays in the mode of assembling the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 comprises a plurality of ball striking operation handles 30. Parts image corresponding to each of the four parts B1 to B4 Of the parts A part capable of executing a handle assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZB1 to ZB4.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the right-handed operation start timing is reached by completing the ball striking operation handle 30 by assembling.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first part image and the second part image in a mode different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the part image ZB1 in the handle assembly effect). The assembly order of the ZB4 is the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described in FIG. 8-4 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the ball striking handle 30 is being assembled. Are in a different order.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7 or 8.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a mode of assembling them, and then launches the game medium with the operation component image corresponding to the launch operation unit. It can be displayed in the mode (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, the ball striking operation handle as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). A part for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that 30 is rotated to the right.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
More specifically, it is possible to provide the player with the timing to start the right-handed operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Second invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the second invention shown below. That is, in a conventional game machine capable of playing a game by launching a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area. An advantageous state having a first path and a second path different from the first path, and having a game ball flowing down the second path after the end of the jackpot game state, which is more advantageous than flowing down the first path. In those controlled by (time saving state, etc.), it is possible to perform a promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages the game ball to be launched so that the game ball flows down the second path before the advantageous state is started. There were things. In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, in the promotion effect, the effect is monotonous only by prompting the game ball to be launched so as to flow down the second path, so that it is not possible to improve the interest. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, a game board 2) and a second part (for example, parts D1 to D4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means has a first component image (for example, a game board image Z20) related to the first component and a second component image (for example, component images ZD1 to) related to the second component. ZD4) can be displayed, and a specific part image (for example, a route image) using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). In the route assembly effect, by displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in the mode of assembling the game board image Z20, the path image finally corresponding to the second path K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the part image ZD1). A portion capable of displaying a path image) using at least a part of ~ ZD4. See FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second route can be preferably focused on, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the route assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the second path K2 in which the game ball flows down, the player can perform the right-handed operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed operation is reached. Become.
Further, in the route assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZD1 to ZD4, that is, by displaying the unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that the right-handed operation start timing has not been reached. By displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area Y).
A first path (for example, the first path K1) through which the game medium launched into the game area can flow down, a second path different from the first path (for example, the second path K2), and
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the launch operation promotion effect A at the start of the jackpot) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the launch operation of the game medium so that the game medium flows down the second path. Part) and
With
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, a game board 2) and a second part (for example, parts D1 to D4).
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means can display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in order (for example, the effect control CPU 120). , A portion displayed in a mode in which component images ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially assembled in the route assembly effect. See FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the launching operation unit can be preferably paid attention to, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by performing the route assembly effect before executing the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. 8-24 (L), the right-handed operation is performed before the start timing of the right-handed operation. By making it possible for the player to be fully aware of the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-handed hitting operation, the player can perform the right-handed hitting operation without rushing when the start timing of the right-handed hitting operation is reached.
Further, in the route assembly effect, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZD1 to ZD4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the right-handed operation start timing is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The plurality of parts include a third part (for example, electronic parts such as solenoids, switches, wirings, connectors, etc.).
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the component image ZD1 corresponding to the components D1 to D4 in the route assembly effect. In the ZD4 and the game board image Z20, the display of the electronic component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the solenoid, switch, wiring, and connector of each component is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The second part is a more characteristic part than the first part.
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is more characteristic than the parts D1 to D3 in the route assembly effect. A part in which the component image ZD4 corresponding to the component D4 is displayed in a manner of being assembled after the component images ZD1 to ZD3.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the effect.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the second path K2 has been completed, that is, that it is the start timing of the right-handed operation, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) has a model-specific part (for example, unique (specific) gaming information unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, the number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ) Etc.) is displayed, it has an obstacle such as an obstacle nail or a windmill, a movable body for directing, a decorative part, etc.)
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means may display a game area image related to the game area, and when displaying the game area image, at least a part of the model-specific portion is omitted. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2 and the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least a part of the model-specific part is omitted.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the same promotion effect can be executed between a plurality of types of models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same route assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on different models of game machines without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You will be able to do it.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect for prompting the game medium to be launched so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is left-handed notification based on the end of the time saving state. The viable part.),
In the special promotion effect, the first component image and the second component image are not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state. The part where the handle assembly effect is not executed before the operation. See FIG. 8-21 (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress annoyance.
Specifically, when the player is controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a time saving state), a steering wheel assembly effect or a route assembly effect is performed, while the state that is advantageous to the player is controlled to a disadvantageous state. When this is done, the player can be made aware that the game state has changed by not performing the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The plurality of parts include a common part (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) through which both the game medium flowing down the first path and the game medium flowing down the second path can pass. ,
The promotion effect executing means can display a common part image corresponding to the common part (for example, a part image corresponding to the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) in the promotion effect (modification example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an effect including parts common to the first path and the second path.
Specifically, for example, as in the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, a component provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first path K1 and a game ball flowing down the second path K2 can win a prize. Can also be used for route assembly production.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
After the promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect, the second path image corresponding to the second path is recognizable to the player, and the second path image is flowed down by the game medium. It is possible to display (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the route assembly effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J), the route image corresponding to the second path K2 is displayed to the player. A part capable of performing a flow-down effect in which the path image is displayed in a recognizable manner and the game ball flows down.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to urge the player to perform an operation of launching a game ball on the second path K2 assembled by the route assembly effect.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The promotion effect executing means displays in the mode of assembling the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 constitutes a second path K2). Part image corresponding to each of the four parts D1 to D4 Of the parts A part capable of executing a route assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZD1 to ZD4.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the right-handed operation start timing is reached by completing the second path K2 by assembling.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9.
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZD1 in the route assembly effect). The assembling order of the ZD4 is different from the actual assembling order in the manufacturing process in order to clearly indicate to the player that the second path K2 is being assembled. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or 10.
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a mode of assembling them, and then launches the game medium with the operation component image corresponding to the launch operation unit. It can be displayed in the mode (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the route assembly effect, the ball striking operation handle as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (F) and 8-24 (L). A part for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that 30 is rotated to the right.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.
More specifically, it is possible to provide the player with the timing to start the right-handed operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Third invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, it is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15392. For example, before the operation validity period of the chance button as a predetermined member is started, an image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving and displaying toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two button transparent images overlap in the center, it notifies that the operation validity period of the chance button has started. There was something to do. The gaming machine described in the above patent gazette has a problem that it cannot improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32, etc.) is provided.
The predetermined member is a plurality of parts (for example, parts A1 to A5) including a first part (for example, part A1), a second part (for example, part A5), and a third part (for example, part A2). Configured
When the predetermined member becomes available, the predetermined member image related to the predetermined member can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the predetermined member image in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 in the operation promotion effect. As shown in (B), a portion for performing an operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 when the operation valid period is started.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image related to the first component and the second component image related to the second component are displayed, but the third component image related to the third component is displayed. Is not displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the wiring C, the connector CN, the controller sensor unit 35A, and the component image ZA2 corresponding to the component A2 (rear base 604) in the controller assembly effect. The part where the display of the component image corresponding to the electronic component such as the push sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a predetermined member can be preferably focused on, so that the interest is improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined member (for example, the stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of a detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a gripping member 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player.
It is provided with a promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player.
The promotion effect executing means can display the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has five components out of a plurality of components in the controller assembly effect. Parts image corresponding to each of A1 to A5 A part to be displayed in the manner of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the promotion effect.
By performing the controller assembly effect, it is possible to make the player fully aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated by the time the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is started. The player will be able to operate without panic when the start timing of the operation valid period is reached.
Further, in the controller assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZA1 to ZA4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the operation valid period is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined member (for example, the movable body 32) is movable and can be operated.
It is possible to operate the predetermined member when displaying the first component image and the second component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). The part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and the part image ZE1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in 8-30 (B), a portion in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. Modification 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be preferably paid attention to.
Specifically, the player's expectation that the movable body 32 moves to the effect position can be suitably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (for example, a stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (for example, a push button 31B).
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting whether the predetermined member image related to the first predetermined member or the second predetermined member is displayed (for example, for effect control). A portion where the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggestion effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled and the operation is effective in the super reach effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's expectation as to which operation member the operation is effective before the operation effective period is started.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembling manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is among a plurality of components constituting the stick controller 31A). Parts image corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 A part capable of executing a controller assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the start timing of the operation valid period is reached by completing the stick controller 31A by assembling.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 5.
A first display pattern displayed in a mode in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled, and
A second pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are not assembled, and
(For example, the controller image Z1 completed by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the mode in which the effect control CPU 120 attaches the component images ZA2 to ZA5 to the component image ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. A controller based on any of the effect patterns A and B for displaying the above and the effect patterns C and D for not displaying the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the part image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the part image ZA1. The part where the assembly effect can be executed. See Fig. 8-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the parts are assembled and the assembly is completed.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in an assembling mode, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component image used for the assembling (for example,). A portion in which an assembly suggestion effect can be executed, which is displayed in a mode of collecting images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect, such as during a super reach effect before the controller assembly effect is executed. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the assembly is completed by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

(Fourth Invention)
Further, the feature unit 063SG includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, it is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15392. For example, before the operation validity period of the chance button as a predetermined member is started, an image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving and displaying toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two button transparent images overlap in the center, it notifies that the operation validity period of the chance button has started. There was something to do. The gaming machine described in the above patent gazette has a problem that it cannot improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32, etc.) is provided.
The predetermined member is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (for example, part A1) and a second part (for example, part A5) that is more characteristic than the first part.
When the predetermined member becomes available, the predetermined member image related to the predetermined member can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the predetermined member image in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 in the operation promotion effect. As shown in (B), a portion for performing an operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 when the operation valid period is started.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to display the first component image related to the first component and the second component image related to the second component.
The second component image is displayed after the first component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in order in the effect pattern B, and FIGS. 8-18. As shown in (E), (F), and (G), a portion for displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5, which is more characteristic than the parts A1 to A4, in a manner of assembling after the part images ZA1 to ZA4. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a predetermined member can be preferably focused on, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly of the stick controller 31A has been completed, that is, that the start timing of the operation valid period has come, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the second component image is displayed, it is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the component image related to the other component (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). As shown, when the component image ZA5 is displayed in the manner of being assembled to the component image ZA1, the component image ZA5 is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image is displayed around the component image ZA5 to highlight or display the image. A part that is displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to identify the part than other part images ZA1 to ZA4, such as moving the display from the peripheral edge of the display area of the device 5 toward the center.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined member (for example, the stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of a detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a gripping member 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player.
It is provided with a promotion effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player.
The promotion effect executing means can display the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has five components out of a plurality of components in the controller assembly effect. Parts image corresponding to each of A1 to A5 A part to be displayed in the manner of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the promotion effect.
Specifically, the operation validity period of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is started by performing the controller assembly effect before executing the operation promotion notification shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B). By the time, the stick controller 31A to be operated can be made fully aware of the player, so that the player can operate the stick controller 31A without rushing when the start timing of the operation valid period is reached. Become.
Further, in the controller assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, each part image ZA1 to ZA4 is displayed individually and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the operation valid period is not reached. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The predetermined member (for example, the movable body 32) is movable and can be operated.
It is possible to operate the predetermined member when displaying the first component image and the second component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). The part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and the part image ZD1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in 8-30 (B), a portion in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. Modification 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be preferably paid attention to.
Specifically, the player's expectation that the movable body 32 moves to the effect position can be suitably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (for example, a stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (for example, a push button 31B).
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting whether the predetermined member image related to the first predetermined member or the second predetermined member is displayed (for example, for effect control). A portion where the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggestion effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled and the operation is effective in the super reach effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, so that the interest is improved.
Specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's expectation as to which operation member the operation is effective before the operation effective period is started.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembling manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is among a plurality of components constituting the stick controller 31A). Parts image corresponding to each of the five parts A1 to A5 A part capable of executing a controller assembly effect displayed in a mode of assembling ZA1 to ZA5.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, not only the images of a plurality of parts are shown, but also the player can be suitably notified that the start timing of the operation valid period is reached by completing the stick controller 31A by assembling.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 6.
A first display pattern displayed in a mode in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled, and
A second pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are not assembled, and
(For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in the mode of assembling the component images ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. Controller assembly effect based on any of the effect patterns A and B to be performed and the effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the part image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the part image ZA1. The part where can be executed. See Fig. 8-9 (C))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the parts are assembled and the assembly is completed.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
Before displaying the plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in an assembling mode, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component image used for the assembling (for example,). A part in which a parts assembly effect that is displayed in a mode of collecting images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect can be executed during a super reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect. See Modification 2 of FIG. 8-26. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the assembly is completed by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the operation promotion effect, a mode in which the controller assembly effect for assembling the stick controller 31A is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the controller assembly effect. , The push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed. Further, either the controller assembly effect or the push button assembly effect may be selected and executed, or both the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be started together. When either the controller assembly effect or the push button assembly effect is selected and executed, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is selected at a higher rate than the push button assembly effect, while the operation target. When is the push button 31B, it is preferable to select the push button assembly effect at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect including the controller assembly effect is exemplified at the timing of determining the confrontation result of the battle effect in the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Timing to notify whether re-variation is executed in pseudo-continuous production, various timings in advance notice production suggesting the possibility of big hit, timing to notify whether to be promoted to probability fluctuation big hit in promotion production Other effects such as the timing to notify whether the round will continue during the big hit and the timing to notify whether the game ball will pass through the probability change switch and be controlled to the probability fluctuation state during the big hit. It can be executed at any time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect including the controller assembly effect has two operation units, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, as operation targets, and the effective operation unit of the two operation units is effective. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation target is any one of three or more types of operation units other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. However, it may be intended only for any one of the operation units.

(Modification example 1)
Further, as described above, in the case where it is not known which of the two operation units of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective as the operation target, for example, in the assembly production, the stick controller 31A and the push button are pushed. It may be possible to execute an assembly effect in which it is difficult to specify which of the buttons 31B is assembled and the operation is effective. Here, a modification 1 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-25. 8-25 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing the assembly effect in the first modification of the feature unit 063SG.

In the assembly effect in the operation promotion effect as a modification 1 of the feature unit 063SG, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), after displaying the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3, FIG. 8-25 (B) ) As shown in (C), which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B corresponds to the component is displayed in a mode in which the component image Z30, which is difficult to identify, is assembled, and is shown in FIG. 8-25 (D). As the assembly progresses, the component corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is changed in a identifiable manner, and as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (E) and 8-25 (F), the component is changed. If the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller image Z1 is finally assembled, and if the operation target is the push button 31B, the push button image Z3 is finally assembled (illustrated). Omitted) is possible.

In the present modification 1, as a display mode of the component image Z30 for making it difficult to identify the operation target, it is displayed in the form of a black circle having the character "?" (FIGS. 8-25 (B) (C), etc.). ), The form in which the part is displayed as a silhouette (Fig. 8-25 (D), etc.) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the part image is mosaicked or the outer shape of the part is deformed. Alternatively, various display modes other than the above may be adopted, such as reducing the brightness of the image display device 5. Further, while the visibility is being lowered near the completion of assembly, the parts may be colored or a sticker is attached, and then the parts may be displayed in color together with the effect image.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which a parts assembly effect suggesting which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is effective in the operation promotion effect can be executed, but the present invention is limited to this. As an assembly suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the controller assembly effect is executed, the parts assembly effect may be executable. Here, a modification 2 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-26. 8-26 is a diagram showing the super reach effect in the second modification of the feature unit 063SG in FIGS. 8 to 26.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (E), for example, during a super reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect, a component displayed in a mode of collecting image images of parts assembled in the controller assembly effect. The collective production may be feasible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), it is difficult to identify which part is the part image Z31 corresponding to each of the plurality of parts constituting the operation target to be assembled in the assembly effect. It is displayed in a mode (for example, it is displayed in a form having a character "?" In front of the silhouette of the part), and as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (B) (C), the parts are sequentially displayed with the passage of time. By displaying (fade-in display) in a mode that changes to a identifiable mode, the operation target to be assembled in the assembly effect is gradually clarified, so that the player's interest can be attracted.

The timing for changing the part image Z31 to an identifiable mode may be a predetermined timing, a timing linked to a chance-up effect in the super reach effect, or the timing for the player. It may be various timings such as the timing when a specific mode of operation (for example, long pressing for a predetermined time, operating a button a predetermined number of times, etc.) is performed in a specific period during which the promotion effect for prompting the operation is not executed. ..

Further, in the assembly suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), all the part images Z31 may be finally identifiable, or as shown in FIG. 8-26 (E). Finally, only a part of the component image Z31 may be identifiablely displayed. When all the part images Z31 are finally identifiable, the effect patterns A and B that complete the assembly are easily executed in the controller assembly effect, and finally only some part images Z31 are identifiable and displayed. If this is the case, it is sufficient to facilitate the execution of the effect patterns C and D in which the assembly is not completed in the controller assembly effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in other effects (for example, a look-ahead effect related to the hold memory display, a notice effect, etc.) during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect. You may try to limit. By doing so, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the promotion effect of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B that have not been assembled during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect.

In addition, it is possible to execute the assembly suggestion effect without knowing which of the plurality of operation units will be effective as the operation target, and at least two of the plurality of operation units are unique parts unique to each. When the common parts are common to each of the above, it is preferable to display the common parts before the unique parts in the assembly suggestion effect. By doing so, it is not possible to predict which operation unit will be effective only by displaying the common parts, so that the player's interest can be maintained.

Further, such an assembly suggestion effect may be executed separately from the parts set effect described in the above embodiment, may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect that also serves as a parts set effect, or may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect. It may also serve as an assembly suggestion effect.

(Modification 3)
In the above-described embodiment, in the handle assembly effect, a mode in which the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball striking operation handle 30 are assembled is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the firing is not limited to this. Before the right-handed hit notification in the operation promotion effect A is performed, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the hitting ball operation handle 30 may be displayed in a mode in which they are not assembled. Here, a modification 3 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-27. 8-27 are views (A) to (F) showing the handle assembly effect in the third modification of the feature unit 063SG.

In the handle assembly effect, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball striking operation handle 30 are displayed in the mode of assembling the door frame image Z16. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to (D). The component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged manner, and as shown in FIG. 8-27 (E), the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in an aggregated manner, and then the figure is shown. Right-handed notification may be performed as shown in 8-27 (F).

The mode for sequentially displaying each component image ZB1 to ZB4 can be changed in various ways. For example, one or a plurality of each component image ZB1 to ZB4 crosses the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed in a mode that appears from the periphery of the display area and gathers in the center, or displayed in a mode that gradually changes from a difficult-to-identify mode to a identifiable mode (fade-in display). Is also possible.

(Modification example 4)
In the above-described embodiment, in the route assembly effect, a mode in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 are displayed in a mode of assembling to the game board image Z20 has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 may be displayed in a mode in which they are not assembled before the right-handed notification in the launch operation promotion effect B is performed. Here, a modification 4 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-28. 8-28 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing the route assembly effect in the modified example 4 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the route assembly effect, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 constituting the second path K2 are displayed in a mode of assembling to the game board image Z20. For example, they are shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) to (E). As described above, after each component image ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged display mode, right-handed notification may be performed as shown in FIG. Further, when displaying in the enlarged mode, the effect image Z35 for highlighting the component image may be displayed around the component images ZD1 to ZD4.

The order in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are enlarged and displayed may be the order in which the game ball passes when the game ball is hit to the right. By doing so, FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J) are shown. It is possible to make the player recognize the flow of the game ball flowing down the second path K2 without performing the flow-down effect described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the launch operation promotion effect A in which the steering wheel assembly effect is executed at the start of the big hit is executed, and the path assembly effect is executed at the end of the big hit (at the start of the time saving state). Although the embodiment in which the effect B is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the jackpot and fired at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the time saving state). The operation promotion effect A may be executed. Further, either the launch operation promotion effect A or the launch operation promotion effect B may be executed at both the start and end of the jackpot.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the route assembly effect is executed in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the launch operation promotion effect B, the flow-down effect is executed in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (K). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flow-down effect may be omitted at least as long as the route assembly effect is executed. Further, when the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the big hit, in the flow effect, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (J), the game ball is finally replaced with the image of winning the variable winning ball device 6B. Finally, the image of the game ball winning the special variable winning ball device 7 may be displayed. Further, the flow-down effect may be executed after the handle assembly effect is executed in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E) of the firing operation promotion effect A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the route assembly effect shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the launch operation promotion effect B, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in a manner of assembling to the game board image Z20. After that, an example is shown in which the game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are finally assembled is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is final. A game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled may be displayed. That is, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the completed image ZB5 in which all the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally assembled may not be displayed, but the unfinished image may be displayed. As described above, in each assembly effect, the completed image of the predetermined member does not necessarily have to be displayed as long as the third part image using at least two part images is displayed.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, a component image constituting the operation unit as a detection means for detecting the movement of the player is assembled. Although the mode of displaying in the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32 (predetermined member) provided so as to be operable from the origin position to the effect position. When executing the movable body effect to be operated toward the movable body 32 (predetermined member), it may be possible to execute the movable body assembly effect that displays the image of the parts constituting the movable body 32 (predetermined member) in a specific mode (for example, an assembly mode). ..

Here, a modification 5 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. 8-29 are views showing the operation mode of the movable body, and FIG. 8B is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. 8-30 are explanatory views showing the operation promotion effect as the modification 5 in FIGS. 8 to 30C. 8-31 are explanatory views (D) to (G) showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 5.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (A), the movable body 32 is located between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position located substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is provided so that it can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (B), the movable body 32 is an LED assembled on the front side of the base member 501 and the base member 501, and a plurality of LEDs (light emitting diodes) are arranged on the front surface. It is mainly composed of a substrate 502, a base frame body 503, and lens members 504A to 504C capable of transmitting light from LEDs. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 501 will be referred to as a component E1, the LED substrate 502 will be referred to as a component E2, the base frame 503 will be referred to as a component E3, and the lens members 504A to 504C will be referred to as a component E4.

In the fifth modification, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stick controller 31A or the push button as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B) at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the above-mentioned battle effect. The detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B for which the operation is enabled by executing the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of any of the 31B. This is variable when the player detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or when the operation valid period elapses without inputting the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. When the display result is a big hit, the result of the battle effect is notified, and the movable body effect of dropping the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 also starts the movable body assembly effect when executing the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), the component image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and is movable to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. The part image ZE1 (part image ZE2 to ZE4) corresponding to the body assembly effect is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are advanced together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. The built-in LED may be made to emit light according to the vertical movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), the effect control CPU 120 completes the assembly of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect before completing the assembly of the movable body 32 in the movable body assembly effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), the controller image Z1 is displayed to notify the operation promotion of the stick controller 31A, while the assembly of the movable body 32 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), it is variable at the timing when the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A is input during the operation valid period or when the operation valid period elapses without input of the detection signal. When the display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and the effect image Z40 is displayed around the movable body 32 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the ally character is the enemy character. If the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 is not dropped from the origin position to the production position, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Notifies that the variable display result is lost.

It should be noted that the assembly of the movable body 32 may not be completed in the movable body assembly effect regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Further, the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect may be completed or failed to be assembled at the same timing, or the controller assembly effect may be completed or failed to be assembled before the movable body assembly effect.

Further, in the modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 illustrates a mode in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are executed at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body assembly is not limited to this. The effect may be executed independently of the controller assembly effect (operation promotion effect). Further, in the modified example 5, the form in which the movable body 32 that can be operated is applied as an example of the predetermined part material is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined member is an inoperable decorative member or the like. It may be another member, or may be a game-related gaming member or structure such as a winning opening forming member or a passage forming member such as a special variable winning ball device 7 or a variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state (at the start of the time saving state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, and the launch operation promotion effect A is executed at the end of the jackpot game state (at the start of the time saving state). You may. Further, either the launch operation promotion effect A or the launch operation promotion effect B may be executed at the start and end of the jackpot game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, the component images constituting the predetermined members are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the image of the parts constituting the predetermined member is displayed in a specific mode, the first part is displayed as the second part as described above. In addition to displaying in the form of assembling to the component, the wiring may be displayed in the form of connecting to a connector so that it can be identifiable that a signal is flowing through the wiring after being connected.

That is, the mode of assembling the parts includes not only the assembling of the parts but also the connection of the parts (wiring), the coloring, processing, or molding of the parts. Further, a mode in which each component image is sequentially enlarged (or reduced) as in the modified examples 3 and 4, a mode in which each component image is sequentially emphasized, and a mode in which each component image is arranged in a predetermined member. It is possible to display in various modes other than the above-mentioned assembly mode, such as those displayed in. That is, the component includes all components constituting the predetermined member, such as members constituting the predetermined member, electronic components such as solenoids, motors, sensors, and LEDs, wiring, and screws.

Further, the component image is not limited to an image imitating a component constituting a predetermined member (such as an image displayed in a manner in which a player can identify the component), but is related to a component constituting the predetermined member. If it is an image to be used, for example, it is possible to specify a part with the minimum elements such as an outline, but by omitting a part of the part, whitening, blurring, deforming, deforming, etc., the game It also includes an image or the like in which a person displays a part in a mode that is difficult to identify.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, electronic parts such as wiring, a connector, a sensor, and a solenoid have a bad appearance. Although the form in which the parts are not displayed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these electronic parts and parts having a bad appearance may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect, the path assembly effect, and the movable body assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, each part image corresponding to each part is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint position. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to the present invention, although the embodiment is displayed in a different form (perspective view) and each part image is moved straight toward a predetermined part image at a predetermined speed to be assembled. The component images may be displayed in different viewpoint positions (for example, front view, side view, rear view, plan view, bottom view, etc.). Further, the component image may be rotated and displayed, reduced / enlarged, and moved, or may be moved non-linearly. In addition, the moving speed can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect, the path assembly effect, and the movable body assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, each part image corresponding to each part is assembled one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be performed in a mode in which a plurality of parts are assembled together.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect, and the route assembly effect, a plurality of parts constituting the operation unit capable of detecting the movement of the player are assembled. Although the form to be displayed in the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined member that is not an operation unit that can detect the movement of the player, such as a path assembly effect and a movable body assembly effect { For example, in addition to the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the ball striking operation handle 30, and the movable body 32, the speakers 8L and 8R, various decorative parts, an image display device 5, various winning opening forming members, a variable winning ball device, and a game area Y. A plurality of parts constituting the game board 2, the pachinko game machine 1 (including the glass door frame, the game machine frame 3, and the like)} may be displayed in a specific mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect is started at a predetermined timing before the timing when the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed, and the handle assembly effect in the launch operation promotion effect The route assembly effect exemplifies a form in which the handle image Z17 is started at a predetermined timing before the display, but for example, the controller assembly effect may be started during the battle effect, and the handle assembly may be started. The production and the route assembly production may be started from the start timing of the fanfare period or the ending period. That is, the start timing is arbitrary.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect exemplify a mode in which all component images are continuously assembled within a predetermined period, but the present invention illustrates this. For example, the display (for example, cut-in display) in which one component image is assembled to another component image may be displayed stepwise in a plurality of times. For example, in the controller assembly effect (specific effect), the display of the mode in which one component image is assembled to another component image from the start of the variable display may be displayed stepwise in a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory can be executed, one part image is combined with another part image in a plurality of variable displays prior to the variable display in which the operation promotion effect is executed in the super reach effect. It is also possible to display the mode to be attached step by step, and to display that the assembly is completed in the variable display that executes the operation promotion effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the mode in which the component image is assembled during the execution of the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect, a background image, an effect image, or the like of the component image is displayed. It is possible to output the effect sound effect and the like, and the jackpot expectation may be different by changing the display mode of the background image and the effect image and the mode of the effect sound effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect, the handle assembly effect, and the route assembly effect, a mode in which each part image is moved and displayed (moving image display) to display an assembling mode is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and may be displayed, for example, in a manner in which a friendly character or an enemy character introduced in the super reach effect assembles each component image. In addition, in this case, the type of character (for example, whether the character to be assembled is a friendly character or an enemy character) and the mode of the character (for example, the color, facial expression, body shape, possession of the character's clothes). The jackpot expectation may differ depending on the item you are using.

Further, in the controller assembly effect in the above-described embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed one by one in order and displayed, but each component A1 to A5 can be identified by a plurality of component images ZA1. ~ ZA5 may be displayed one by one or a plurality of ZA5s are assembled one by one from the state where all of them are displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect and the component images related to the plurality of components including the first component and the second component constituting each of the ball striking operation handle 30 in the handle assembly effect are assembled. After displaying in the above, as a specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image, a form of displaying the completed images ZA6 and ZB5 in which the assembly is completed has been illustrated. The specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image is not necessarily limited to the completed image in which the assembly is completed by assembling all the part images. There is no unfinished image ZA7, or an image using at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the part image ZD1 in the route assembly production (for example, an image in which the part image ZD1 is assembled to the game board image Z20. FIG. 8-23. It may be an unfinished image in which a first part image and a second part image corresponding to at least two parts out of a plurality of parts (see (B)) are assembled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect as shown in FIG. 8-17 (F), and then shows FIG. 8-19 (A). Although the form of displaying the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A is illustrated as shown in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and after displaying the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A, the completed image ZA6 May be displayed in a manner of assembling to the game machine frame 3, and then the controller image Z1 may be displayed. Further, the completed image ZA6 and the controller image Z1 may or may not be the same image.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, the movement of a player is detected. A push button and an operation lever are provided as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There was something that could be done. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, when any of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes stepwise starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. (See Fig. 8-16) and
With
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Or, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!").
When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect (for example, a set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). When the parts set effect of is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the parts set effect of the set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. Part to be. See Fig. 8-10)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode can be gradually increased, so that the interest of the game is improved. To do.
Specifically, when the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is enabled, not only the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 is displayed and the operation promotion effect is started, but also the operation promotion effect is started. By executing the parts assembly effect before the operation, it is possible to suggest to the player that the controller image Z1 which is likely to be a big hit in the operation promotion effect is displayed, so that the big hit reliability is high. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation that the controller image Z1 is displayed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The specific effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the specific effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of specific effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example,. Each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters "?" Are displayed. See Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the specific effect executing means is in the advantageous state, the specific effect image is displayed at a higher rate than in the case where the advantageous state is not obtained, when a plurality of specific effect images are displayed stepwise in the specific effect. A portion in which the mode is changed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modification example of FIG. 8-33. 7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the display mode of the specific effect image changes while the number of display of the specific effect image increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the first aspect of the promotion effect and the second aspect of the promotion effect is executed in the specific effect, and then the specific effect execution means. Which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed is displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the part image is displayed in the first to third stages. ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to discriminate which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner in which the player can identify whether the part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the promotion effect of the second aspect will be executed because it is not known until the middle of the specific effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
When the specific effect image does not change to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect). When the push button 31B is determined, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set are higher than the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 that succeed in set. Therefore, when the parts assembly effect based on the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to set is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the promotion effect is not executed.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the feature unit 063SG includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, the movement of a player is detected. A push button and an operation lever are provided as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect that encourages the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the operation validity period of the push button or the operation lever. There was something that could be done. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, when any of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect is monotonous only by displaying the effect image corresponding to the effective detection means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve the interest
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.)
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a stick controller during the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the 31A or the push button 31B. See FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B).
Before the promotion effect is executed, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect that displays the specific effect image stepwise (for example, before the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect). A portion capable of executing a component set effect of stepwise displaying component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect. FIGS. 8-14 to 8- 16) and
With
The promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. It is possible (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 has a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character "close!" On the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Image Z2 is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and the character image Z4 "press!" Are displayed on the image display device 5).
The specific effect executing means can specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed after the specific effect image is displayed stepwise. The effect can be executed (for example, in the component assembly effect, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in silhouette mode, that is, the player is either a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B. It is displayed in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult to identify whether it is a part image of It is displayed in an identifiable manner capable of identifying which part image of 31B is (see FIG. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the promotion effect of the second aspect will be executed because it is not known until the middle of the specific effect whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. Can be gradually increased, which improves the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The specific effect executing means is an effect image (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to 1) related to an effect image (for example, controller image Z1 or push button image Z3) used for the promotion effect as the specific effect image. It is characterized in that it can display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is an effect performed in connection with the promotion effect.
More specifically, the effect images related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 that form a part of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3, and each of these component images. By displaying in order, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that all the part images are collected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of specific effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed (for example, each). The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 have a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface aspect from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first and second stages. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters such as "?" Are displayed. (See Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The promotion effect executing means is executed in connection with a specific promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) executed in response to the specific effect and a predetermined promotion effect (for example, a dialogue advance notice) executed regardless of the specific effect. Operation promotion effect, etc.) and can be executed,
In the predetermined promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a mode different from the specific promotion effect (for example, the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the dialogue advance notice is executed in connection with the parts assembly effect. A part in which the display mode is different from that of the controller image Z1 for the operation promotion effect. See FIG. 8-32. Modification example 6)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the confusion between the specific promotion effect and the predetermined promotion effect due to the difference in the mode, while preventing the deterioration of the interest due to not executing the predetermined promotion effect during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The specific effect executing means displays the specific effect image based on one of a plurality of display patterns having different ratios of the advantageous states (for example, effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3). , PT2-1, PT2-2, PT2-3, and the execution rate is set so that the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot increases in this order. See FIG. 8-10 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the types of effects can be diversified, and the player can expect whether or not the display pattern will be in an advantageous state, so that the display pattern can be focused on.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first aspect or the second aspect by using a special effect image different from the specific effect image (for example, the operation promotion effect used for the operation promotion effect). A part where a specific effect may be executed using a special effect image (for example, a character image) that has nothing to do with the image)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness by the appearance of a special effect image.

(Modification 6)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-32. 8-32 are explanatory views (A) to (C) showing an operation promotion effect as a modification 6 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above embodiment, after executing the parts assembly effect in the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (V), either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used to notify whether or not the hit is a big hit. The controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed when the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation is executed, but it is separate from the operation promotion effect for notifying whether or not such a big hit. , When executing the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the controller has a mode different from that of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (V). It is preferable to display an image Z63, a push button image (not shown), or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), when the parts assembly effect is being executed in the super reach effect, the ally character wins the battle effect and becomes a big hit when the movement of the player is detected. When it is possible to execute a dialogue notice as a warning effect in which a dialogue suggesting a possibility is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the stick controller 31A (or a push button) is given to the player during the operation validity period. It is possible to display the controller image Z63 (or push button image) that prompts the operation of 31B). When the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) is detected during the operation valid period, the character image Z61 and the dialogue image Z62 are displayed.

The controller image ZA1 has a display mode in which the effect image Z60 imitating a flame is not displayed around the stick controller 31A as in the controller image Z1 at the time of assembly production. As described above, the controller image ZA1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the dialogue notice is different from the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in connection with the parts set effect, so that the parts set is different. Since it is possible to execute other promotion effects during the production, and it becomes easier to understand that the advance notice effect is different from the operation promotion effect performed in connection with the parts set effect, the player can perform the parts set effect and others. It becomes easy to understand which of the productions of the above is related to the operation promotion production.

(Modification 7)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33. 8-33 are explanatory views (A) to (E) showing an operation example of the component assembly effect as the modification 7 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 for the component assembly effect, either the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B It was displayed in order, but when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of the image displayed in the middle may be switched (changed) from the part images ZC1 to ZC5 to the part images ZA1 to ZA5. ..

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (C), the component images ZC1 and ZC2 corresponding to the second push button 31B are displayed, but when the third and subsequent component images are displayed. , The component images ZA3 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be displayed in the third and subsequent stages. That is, in this case, the effect pattern PT1-1 to PT1-3 corresponding to the push button 31B is changed to the effect pattern PT2-1 to PT2-3 corresponding to the stick controller 31A, and the promotion pattern is changed to increase the jackpot reliability. Has been done.

(Modification 8)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature unit 063SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-34. 8-34 are explanatory views (A) to (B) showing an operation example of the operation promotion effect as a modification 8 of the feature unit 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) or 8-19 (B), a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A or a push button image imitating the push button 31B. When the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected while the Z3 is displayed, if the variable display result is lost, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) (F). The variable display result is notified that the stick controller 31A is lost. For example, when the loss is notified when the controller image Z1 of the stick controller 31A is displayed, the figure shows when the operation of the player's stick controller 31A is detected. As shown in 8-34 (B), the effect image in which the stick controller 31A is disassembled (broken) may be displayed.

By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display result is lost by operating the stick controller 31A. Further, particularly when the controller image Z1 is displayed after the assembly is completed in the controller assembly effect, it is possible to notify the player that the assembly has failed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, a mode in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected value of the game medium that can be obtained is not limited to this. There are multiple types of specific game states with different numbers (big hits with different numbers of rounds, etc.), high base states (time saving states) where the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be satisfied than in normal game states, and the probability of becoming the specific game state. Includes high-probability gaming state (high-probability state), high-probability low-base state (latent probability variation state), special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Is done.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player, a stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, a ball striking operation handle 30 including the handle sensor, and the like are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the above, other operating means such as a jog dial, a cross key, a lever, and the player without contacting the operating means. It also includes a video camera, a sensor, and the like that can be detected by digitally recording a predetermined movement of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A as the detection means, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, and the ball striking operation handle 30 including the handle sensor can be detected (for example, pulling toward the front). Controller image Z1 imitating stick controller 31A, push button image imitating push button 31B in operation promotion effect and launch operation promotion effect as promotion effect to encourage the player to perform operation, push operation, rotation operation, etc. Z3, a handle image Z17 imitating the ball striking operation handle 30, a right arrow image Z18, etc. are displayed, and character images such as "close!", "Push!", And "right hit!" Are displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and not only the one that prompts the operation by displaying the effect image as described above, but also the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided on the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the ball striking operation handle 30, and the like. ) Is emitted to promote operation (operation), voice messages indicating operation modes such as "close!", "Push!", And "right-handed!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an image display device. The operation (operation) may be prompted by a display device other than 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, a mode in which the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, that is, one of the two operation units (detection means) is promoted has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and may promote the operation of both the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Further, it may be provided with three or more operation units (detection means) and promote the operation of at least one operation unit (detection means) among the three or more operation units (detection means).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are applied as the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect is only two or more detection means having different movements (operation) modes of the player, such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Instead, two or more detection means (for example, two or more buttons) individually provided even if the operation mode of the player is the same, or a second operation different from the first operation acceptance mode and the first operation acceptance mode. A detection means that can be changed into an acceptance mode (for example, a button whose operation acceptance mode can be changed between a normal operation acceptance mode and a protruding acceptance mode that is more prominent than usual) may be the operation target.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of promotion effects including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the ratio (reliability) of a big hit is higher than when the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. In this case, it suffices if at least two of the three or more modes can be performed (for example, the promotion effect according to the normal operation acceptance mode and the promotion effect according to the protrusion acceptance mode). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the specific effect executed before the promotion effect is executed, the operation promotion effect for urging the player to perform an operation in which the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be detected is executed. Although the embodiment in which the component assembly effect is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the handle image Z17 showing that the hitting ball operation handle 30 is rotated to the right and the right By displaying the arrow image Z18, it may be possible to execute a specific effect corresponding to the right-handed operation promotion effect that gives a right-handed notification.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is displayed in the specific display area Z51 as a specific effect image related to the operation promotion effect that is displayed so that the display mode changes stepwise in the parts assembly effect, and is displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the embodiment in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 constituting the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific effect image is used for the operation promotion effect. If it is a related effect image, it does not have to be a component image that constitutes at least a part of the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect. For example, an operation promotion effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect (for example, a controller image). It may be an effect image having the same display mode as Z1 or the push button image Z3), an effect image having a similar display mode, or an effect image having a different display mode.

That is, the specific effect image that is displayed stepwise in the specific effect is an image (for example, a component) that constitutes at least a part of the operation promotion effect image (for example, controller image Z1 and push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect. Not only related effect images related to the operation promotion effect image (for example, parts images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5, etc.), but also separate effect images not related to the operation promotion effect, that is, used for the operation promotion effect. It may be a special effect image (for example, a character image) that has nothing to do with the operation promotion effect image.

Further, since the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as specific effect images are component images constituting a part of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to be operated in the operation promotion effect, the stick controller 31A and the like. Although the push button 31B was regarded as an effect image that is easy to identify, even an image that constitutes a part of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is an image in a mode in which it is difficult to identify that it is a component image (for example, a fragment). It may be an image such as). Further, the specific effect image may be a photographic image such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B, in addition to an image of a silhouette mode, an icon image, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the specific effect, a mode in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise (in order) in the specific display area Z51 and arranged are exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and corresponds to, for example, a push button image Z3 displayed in an operation promotion effect, a handle image Z17 displayed in a right-handed operation promotion effect, and a right arrow image Z18. When the specific effect can be executed, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed side by side in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect, and then the displayed component image ZA1 is displayed. Assembling the controller to assemble ZA5 Before the promotion effect is executed, the push button image Z3 and the handle image Z17 are assembled by assembling the partial images that form a part of the push button image Z3 and the handle image Z17. The right arrow image Z18 may be formed by collecting partial images that form or form a part of the right arrow image Z18.

That is, in the specific effect, after the specific effect image is displayed stepwise, the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push button image Z3 are displayed). If it becomes possible to specify which of the operation promotion effect () to be executed (the player can predict), the final result is to use a plurality of specific effect images displayed stepwise as in the above embodiment. It is not necessary to display the operation promotion effect image in order, it is sufficient to display a plurality of specific effect images in order, and the display mode of one specific effect image is changed stepwise so that the operation promotion effect image can be specified. (For example, the display mode of the controller image Z1 may be changed stepwise as in the component images ZA1 to ZA5).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect as the specific effect, the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed and the push button image Z3 are displayed in the fourth stage of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5. Although the embodiment in which which of the operation promotion effects to be performed is changed to a mode that can be specified is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and finally the promotion effect of the first aspect (controller image). If it becomes possible to specify which of the operation promotion effect in which Z1 is displayed and the promotion effect in the second aspect (operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is executed, the specific effect image (each) is necessarily specified. It is not necessary to display the component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5) in a mode in which it is possible to specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. That is, after changing each part image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 up to the third stage, it is possible to specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. For example, a character image such as "controller GET!") Is displayed separately from the specific effect image, and a voice that can specify whether the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed. (For example, "Controller GET!" Or the like) may be output.

Further, the stepwise change of the display mode of the specific effect image in the specific effect means that the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A change from the silhouette mode to the icon mode in the component set effect. Not only does the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually increase, that is, the display mode of the specific display area Z51 changes as the specific effect image is displayed stepwise. For example, the display mode such as the color, outer shape, contrast, and brightness of the specific effect image may change with the passage of time, and the characters, symbols, numbers, etc. may be updated or additionally displayed, the level, and the like. Includes those that are displayed in an increase or decrease, those in which a specific effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see.

Further, displaying the specific effect image stepwise in the specific effect means that the display mode of one or more component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage in the component set effect. By not only displaying but also displaying each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in order by a predetermined number, the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases or decreases. This includes displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 so as to form a predetermined operation promotion effect image, as in the controller assembly effect.

Further, the specific effect image may be, for example, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 as they are, or may be an image including the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and a background area around the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Further, the stepwise change may be a part or the whole of the display mode of the specific effect image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 or all component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 as an example of a specific display mode of the specific effect image in the component assembly effect (specific effect). Although the embodiment to which the display mode of collective success is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display mode can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is a predetermined display mode. Even if all of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are not aggregated in the display area Z51, a predetermined specific effect image (for example, component image ZA5 or component image ZC5) may be displayed among the plurality of component images. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step in the specific display area Z51. The image is not limited, and two or more images of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed together, and all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 may be displayed together as in the assembly suggestion effect of the modification 2. , ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in the first stage display mode, and then the display mode of some or all part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be changed stepwise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, an embodiment in which either the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise in the specific display area Z51 has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in a mixed state. In this case, for example, the component image having a large number of images finally displayed may be displayed. The execution of the operation promotion effect by the corresponding operation unit may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, a mode in which the display mode of each component image changes in four stages (see FIG. 8-11) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be changed in at least two steps, and may be changed in five or more steps.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the display mode of each component image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of components are displayed. The image of any one or more of the parts may have an effect pattern in which the display is started from the second or higher stage.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, the display mode of each component image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage at a predetermined timing during the reach effect. Is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed at the timing when the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, each component image is displayed, and in the first to third stages, any of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3. Is displayed in a mode that is difficult to identify (identify), and in the fourth stage, which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 is displayed in an identifiable (identifiable) manner. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least in the first stage, the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push) are illustrated. If it is displayed in a mode in which it is difficult to identify (identify) which of the button image Z3 is displayed (operation promotion effect), it can be identified in the second and third stages. It may be displayed in a (identifiable) manner. Further, the number of stages of displaying in a difficult-to-identify mode and each of the stages displaying in an identifiable mode may be at least 1 or more, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage of the parts assembly effect, a form using a silhouette aspect commonly used in the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 has been illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the first and second stages and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 in the first and second stages are displayed as images having different display modes. You may try to do it. For example, in the first stage or the second stage, any one of a plurality of silhouette images having different display modes may be displayed.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as specific effect images are the promotion effect of the first aspect (operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second aspect (push button image Z3 is displayed). The mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the operation promotion effect to be performed) is, for example, a state in which the outer shape of the part image is deformed or the surface mode is not shown as in the silhouette mode. The player identifies a part such as omitting, whitening, blurring, deforming, etc., or making it difficult for the player to see the specific production image (for example, making it difficult to see by increasing or decreasing the brightness). Includes an image or the like in which the effect image is displayed in a mode that is difficult to specify.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined to display the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect, before displaying the controller image Z1 with the start of the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A. Although the embodiment in which the controller assembly effect can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when it is determined to display the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect. , It is not necessary to execute the controller assembly effect. Further, even when all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed in the component assembly effect (when the assembly is successful), the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A starts without executing the controller assembly effect. The controller image Z1 may be displayed accordingly.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller image Z1 may be displayed in the operation promotion effect even when the effect based on the set failure effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 is executed in the component assembly effect. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the effect based on the set failure effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 is executed, the controller image Z1 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. It may not be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even when an effect based on the effect pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 of the assembly success is executed in the parts assembly effect, the push button is displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the form in which the image Z3 may be displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production based on the production pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 of the collective success is illustrated. When is executed, the push button image Z3 may not be displayed in the operation promotion effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the controller assembly effect can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect pattern type is determined in the parts assembly effect pattern determination process, the execution ratio is different depending on whether the operation target in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the production patterns may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. However, in the operation promotion effect, one of the effect patterns may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the controller assembly effect is executed or not.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the parts set effect as the specific effect is executed during the battle effect period in the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion notification is started. The execution period of the parts assembly effect is arbitrary, for example, other than the execution period of the battle effect of Super Reach (for example, the period after the start of variable display and before the development of Super Reach). May be good. Specifically, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, a pseudo-continuous production that makes one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner. In the case of executing the operation promotion effect according to the above, the specific effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution period of the variable display before the variable display in which the component set effect is executed may be set. Further, the component set effect may be executed a plurality of times during the execution period of one variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the parts set effect as the specific effect, the time for displaying the part image stepwise (effect period) is the same, but the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-1 and PT2-1 are the same. The production period may be different depending on ~ 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect and the specific effect (part assembly effect) corresponding to the operation promotion effect are exemplified only when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and changes when an operation promotion effect and a specific effect (part assembly effect) corresponding to the operation promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of variation patterns having different variable display times. The production time may be different according to the variable display time of the pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly effect, each component image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 appear in order in the specific display area Z51 and are displayed, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, as a look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual one, and the display mode of the hold display or active display can be changed. , The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, which are specific effect images, are changed to a identifiable display mode at the timing before the component assembly effect is started, and the hold is performed at the timing when the component assembly effect is started. It may be possible to execute an effect in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed as the display or the active display are moved to the specific display area Z51 and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that the parts set effect is executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

In the case of a slot machine, the gaming area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of a symbol is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device (for example, a reel, a liquid crystal display, etc.) having the above-mentioned symbol.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also performs variable display of identification information and controls an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1), which is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, and a handle sensor. The ball striking operation handle 30 including (not shown) and the promotion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an operation that can be detected by the detection means is a stick. A portion capable of executing an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to perform a detectable operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the controller 31A or the push button 31B. FIGS. 8-19 (A) (B). ) And the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes stepwise before the promotion effect is executed, in the super reach effect. Before starting the operation promotion effect, a portion capable of executing a component set effect that displays the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation promotion effect stepwise. 8-14 to 8-16), and the promotion effect executing means makes the promotion effect more advantageous than the case where the first aspect and the promotion effect of the first aspect are executed. The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the second mode in which the ratio is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). Either display the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and the character image Z2 "close!" On the image display device 5, or imitate the push button 31B on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B). (Part for displaying the push button image Z3 and the character image Z4 "press!"), When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect is performed in the second aspect. It is feasible (for example, when the component set effect of set success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the component set effect of set failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. A part in which the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect at a high rate. (See FIG. 8-10), the specific effect executing means makes it difficult to specify whether the specific effect image is executed as the promotion effect of the first aspect or the promotion effect of the second aspect. A plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 can be displayed (for example, in the first and second stages, the external shape and the external shape of the components A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the components C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed. It is displayed in a common silhouette mode in which white characters "?" Are displayed on black silhouettes with different surface modes. (See FIG. 8-11), and a plurality of stages of settings in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different. A setting means that can be set to any of the values (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player) (for example, FIG. 9). A special state control means (for example, a jackpot) capable of controlling to a special state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state after the end of the advantageous state and the CPU 103 that executes the set value change process of -15. After the game state is completed, a CPU 103 or the like that controls the probability change state according to the jackpot type) is provided, and the variable display display result when controlled to the special state is different from the specific result. Examples thereof include a game machine in which the ratio of displaying a predetermined result, which is a part of the result, is made different according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 048AKS010). ..

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode, and the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode can be preferably increased stepwise. The interest of the is improved. In addition, since it is suggested which set value is set by the display result of the variable display in the special state, it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition to suggesting the set value based on the display ratio of the predetermined result in the special state, the set value may be suggested by the rate at which the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect. .. For example, when the display mode of the specific effect image is changed stepwise, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to change to the specific display mode, and it is determined to change to the specific display mode according to the set value. By making the ratios different, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is to change to the specific display mode. By doing so, when the display mode of the specific effect image is changed to the specific display mode, the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the second mode and becomes an advantageous state is set. Since the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved, the game interest can be further improved.
Further, in addition to suggesting the set value based on the display ratio of the predetermined result in the special state, the set value may be suggested according to the change mode when the display mode of the specific effect image changes in the specific effect. For example, when the display mode of the specific effect image is changed stepwise, a plurality of types of change patterns (for example, three types of change patterns of A → B → C, A → D → C, A → E → C) can be used. By selecting from among them by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each change pattern different depending on the set value, the set value is advantageous to the player, the specific type (for example, A → The change pattern of E → C) may make it easier to change. By doing so, the change mode when the display mode of the specific effect image changes stepwise becomes abundant, and when the change pattern changes with a specific type of change pattern, the set value set is advantageous for the player. Since the expectation for being a player is improved, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
Further, in this way, the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as a display ratio of a predetermined result in a special state and a ratio at which the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode). Then, when a setting value favorable to the player is suggested by a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and the player can be more certain in a certain factor. Even if an advantageous setting value is not suggested, if an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the game entertainment, the identification information is variablely displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a gaming state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) and has a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player) with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state. Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values from a certain 1 to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of FIGS. 9-15). After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means capable of controlling the special state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the normal state (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, depending on the jackpot type, The ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result as the display result of the variable display when the special state is controlled by the CPU 103 or the like which controls the probability change state). (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 048AKS010) is different depending on the set value set by the setting means. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the feature portion of another form example will be described.
(Explanation of feature 048AK)
Next, the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame, a glass door frame having a glass window can rotate between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame and a door closing position that closes the front surface centering on the left side. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the frame for the game machine can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the frame for the game machine and the glass door frame. It is not possible to open the door.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which the (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Although not shown, the main board 11 in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is mounted on the back of. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the substrate case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the frame closed, and a predetermined door key is used. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. (The same applies to the following feature section 049AK and feature section 050AK). Further, the set set value is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side as a set value designation command (the same applies to the following feature unit 049AK and feature unit 050AK).

9-2 (A) to 9-2 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in the normal state or the time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in the normal state or the time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 to 9-7, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 9-2 (A), 9-3 (A), 9-4 (A), 9-5 (A), 9-6 (A), 9-7 (A). As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIGS. 9-2 (B), 9-3 (B), 9-4 (B), 9-5 (B), 9-6 (B), 9-7 (B). As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is set to 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with reference to the value 32767 as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to make A to big hit F). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) to 9-7 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12. FIG. 9-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the big hit type in the first special figure and the second special figure, high accuracy control and time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit shifts to the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types from A to jackpot F (also called probabilistic jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed. In addition, in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, after the end of the big hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and the big hit G shifts to the low probability high base state (also referred to as non-probability variable big hit). The jackpot type of jackpot H and the jackpot type of jackpot H that the probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high-accuracy control nor time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed eight times (so-called eight rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot). In addition, the big hit game state by "big hit D" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by the "big hit E" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit F" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot).

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control (probability variation state) executed after the end of the jackpot game states of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state (features of the present embodiment). Part 048AK ends when the special figure game (100 times) is executed, or when the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, when a big hit occurs again, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, so-called consecutive villas. It becomes a state.

For example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining the so-called sudden big hit such as the big hit C or the big hit F may be lowered in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the ball ejection rate decreases as the set value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Just do it. In addition to this, the ratio of the jackpot type determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate for the player. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the RAM clear flag is set to 207SGSa010 without executing 207SGSa010. move on.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In the 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. 207SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) Proceed to 207SGSa014 without executing.

In the 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). The recovery process for returning to the state of (207SGSa015) is performed.

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the pachinko game machine is opened while the game machine frame is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while operating the clear switch. When 1 is activated), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa010 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. 1st display unit 207SG029A, 2nd display unit 207SG029B, 3rd display unit 207SG029C, 4th display unit 207SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 207SG029 "E." is displayed in each of the above (207SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 207SGsa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment has the display monitor 207SG029, the first, when an abnormal set value is set or when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in the 207SGSa013d (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process is performed. Although the embodiment of (207SGSa013e) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process may be performed when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y). It may be executed after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGsa021.

FIG. 9-14 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGsa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read to set the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in an address other than the set value.

The feature unit 048AK in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 048AK in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the RAM clear flag can be set by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 25A, the second hold display 25B starts blinking (207SGSa052). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 (207SGSa052a) as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is neither a jackpot A to a jackpot F).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). When any of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A numerical value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or is stored in the address F001. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 25A, the second hold display 25B starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode that is neither a jackpot A to a jackpot F) (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa111; N) in the 207SGSa111, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are finished. All the segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display 207SG131 are turned on, and the first hold display 25A and the second are held. By starting the hold display 25B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., are changing the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only one LED is lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 can be any of the jackpots A to F shown. As long as it is not applicable, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the same as the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment of lighting is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. It may be lit in a different manner.

As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame is open. By turning on the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (base value). Display) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display base value using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is used. Display) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 9-17 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in the process of step S101 of FIG. 5 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 048AK, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 9-18) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control to the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes this winning random number value determination process at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , It is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. .. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 9-17 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, thereby playing pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-14 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 9-19, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-19, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 9-17 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the large hit is not obtained (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. When it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527) and it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When the 207SGS526 determines that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command, the fifth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot D, the sixth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot E, and the seventh symbol designation command when it is a jackpot F (207SGS534). ), Then, as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern, a jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set (207SGS535), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the eighth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 048AK, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but in the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation pattern is used. On the other hand, in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2, and 1 to 1 when the set value is 3. 410, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for motion pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of the determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), when at least the variable display result is “off”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of the 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is “0” (207SGS541). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in the 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined by 207SGS541 that the number of reserved second special figure is "0", and whether or not the number of reserved first special figure is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-14 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 9-14 (B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the setting value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. Along with making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are blinked, or " By displaying "E.", the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the first address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 uses the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature unit 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 9-17 (A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 9-19 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and "big hit A" to "big hit F" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be according to the determination ratio shown in the figure according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of the above (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, the jackpot type may be set to "1" to "6" according to "big hit A" to "big hit F".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition to the pre-determined result of the above, the finalized special symbol is set according to the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small hit symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-14 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used as a cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the judgment used setting is illustrated, although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is executed is illustrated. By storing the value in the area that has not been cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102, the judgment used set value and the RAM 102 are determined when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. It may be possible to compare the set value (set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the first address of.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, a mode in which a variable display result is determined using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. Control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 9-18) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since it is possible to execute a process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an example of a process (process in the pre-reading notice setting process) performed in the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 of FIG. 7. In the process in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step 048AKS001). If no new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the look-ahead notice is not executed, so the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends.

When a new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new start winning command is received. When the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" (in the case of "2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead notice, and here, the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command specifies "no judgment". When, that is, when there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (the contents of the start winning command buffer are checked, and the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is displayed. When each winning judgment result specification command of the previous hold display number or the newly received start winning command is the first starting winning command, each winning command stored in the second starting winning command buffer This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command that specifies a winning judgment result (judgment result equal to or higher than reach) other than "non-reach" in the judgment result specification command. The execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it is already determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye in the variable display executed before the target (when the look-ahead chance eye flag described later is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by preventing the look-ahead chance from being executed for a plurality of targets. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. Note that executing the look-ahead chance eye means executing the look-ahead notice effect by displaying the look-ahead chance eye.

When the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-21, whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye according to the winning determination result, and the type of the look-ahead chance eye when executing is determined. In the feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 9-21, any one of "no execution", "look-ahead chance eye A", and "look-ahead chance eye B" is determined by the determined determination ratio shown in the figure. The look-ahead chance eye is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the target (when a plurality of variable displays are executed, each of the plurality of variable displays) is variablely displayed. As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance eye (a non-reach chance eye when the reach is not established in the variable display).

In the feature unit 048AK, two types of look-ahead chance eyes are prepared, one is "look-ahead chance eye A" and the other is "look-ahead chance eye B". The "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" have different target jackpot expectations and different chance eyes to stop (as shown in FIG. 9-21, the look-ahead chance eye A is "234". The predetermined chance eye is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance eye B, the predetermined chance eye of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be made to emit light when the chance eye is stopped. In this case, the "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" are distinguished from each other by using different emission colors. You may try to do it. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "look-ahead chance B" is executed than when the "look-ahead chance eye A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case where a look-ahead chance eye is configured by a combination of odd-numbered decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, the combination of "315" (Saikou) is a look-ahead chance only when the set value is "6". It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Further, for example, in the case of a low setting, a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, such as "133", "155", and "377", is derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance eye. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number in the predetermined display described later, in that case, one of them is referred to as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. Instead of the right symbol, the left symbol and the middle symbol may have the same number), and if the setting is high, the look-ahead chances are the same, such as "135", "357", and "379". It is also possible to increase the proportion of so-called combinations that do not include numbers and are derived and displayed. That is, the set value may be suggested according to the type of the pre-reading chance eye that is derived and displayed (the pre-reading chance eye may include the setting suggestion effect).

After returning to FIG. 9-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). When the look-ahead chance eye is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. When executing the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005; Yes), after setting the look-ahead chance eye flag indicating that the look-ahead chance eye is executed to the on state (step 048AKS006), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. .. The look-ahead chance eye flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

In addition, for example, a hold display notice effect is performed for the hold of the target of the look-ahead chance so that the player can visually recognize which is the target of the look-ahead chance, and the target of the look-ahead chance is. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the hold display notice effect may be executed at the same time. In addition to the look-ahead chance, the hold display notice may be executed.

FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, so that the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not the result is (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determines whether or not is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye, the predetermined display, and the like are used as a combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination. Which of the displays other than the above is derived and displayed is determined by the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like determination process (step 048AKS010).

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 9-22. In the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like shown in FIG. 9-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance eye flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS011). When the look-ahead chance eye flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has the type of look-ahead chance eye determined in step 048AKS004 of FIG. 9-20 (if the look-ahead chance eye A, the corresponding "234". , And if it is the look-ahead chance B, the corresponding decorative symbol of “345”) is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the process of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variation immediately before the variation targeted at the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye flag is cleared to the off state (step 048AKS014) so that the look-ahead chance eye is not derived and displayed in the target change, and the change is not performed. Reach loss stop The process of determining the symbol, etc. is completed. Note that, for example, if the look-ahead chance is executed only when the target fluctuation is a fluctuation equal to or greater than the reach (when the look-ahead chance is not executed when the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation), the target The look-ahead chance eye flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of. In this way, the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed from the time when the look-ahead chance eyes flag is set to the ON state to the change immediately before the change of the target. In addition, a plurality of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes are prepared in advance as a pattern (for example, when the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation and the target is changed three times, the first and third look-ahead chances are performed. (Pattern for displaying eyes, pattern for displaying pre-reading chance eyes for the second and third times, etc.), and pre-reading chance eyes may be displayed according to the pattern.

When the look-ahead chance eye flag is off in step 048AKS011 (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined display determination process (step 048AKS015). In the feature unit 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value, thereby giving suggestions regarding the set value. Perform setting suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-26, the setting suggestion effect is performed by displaying the definite decorative symbols of the non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to the set values. In addition, the feature unit 048AK performs the predetermined display in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state.

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. 23. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 9-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the probability change control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11. If the probability change control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display is displayed in the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (previous fluctuation) for which the predetermined display is displayed, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is provided.

When the previous flag is on, that is, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous variation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 9-25. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination process is terminated. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous fluctuation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being continuously displayed. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation, is displayed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations as described above, so whether it is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation or a setting that suggests a set value. It makes it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect, and prevents the player from being confused with the look-ahead chance by displaying the predetermined display continuously. In this example, an example of determining whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous fluctuation is shown. For example, the number of consecutive times is counted, and if the number of consecutive times is 2, the predetermined display can be displayed. If it is three times, it may be restricted not to display the predetermined display. Further, the number of times that the predetermined display is continuously displayed may differ depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 9-25 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, whether or not the player is in the so-called consecutive villa state (whether or not the consecutive villa flag described later is on), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Depending on the situation, the ratio of determining that the predetermined display is executed is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the villa is in a row. According to this, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by executing the predetermined display in the so-called consecutive villa state, and to attract the attention of the player after the end of the first big hit. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be executed at a small rate such as 2% even during the consecutive villas.

After returning to FIG. 9-23 and executing the process of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not the predetermined display is present (step 048AKS016). When there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 9-26 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 9-26 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining the type of predetermined display to be executed. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, a combination of "344" decorative symbols is derived and displayed in type A, and "399" decorative symbols are displayed in type B. The combination of the above is derived and displayed, and in the type C, the combination of the decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the higher settings are made in the order of type A <type B <type C. In this example, an example suggesting which setting value is used is shown. For example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is odd or even, and the minimum setting of "1" is set. If it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggestion may be different. Further, there may be a predetermined display of a type that is displayed only when the set value is set high. The high setting may be the setting value of the upper half such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two such as 5 and 6. The setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

After returning to FIG. 9-23 and executing the process of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines the predetermined display (combination of the determined decorative symbols) of the type determined in step 048AKS017 as the final stop symbol (step). 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS019), the count value provided according to the predetermined display type is added by 1 (step 048AKS020), and then the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of the types A to C is displayed during the probable change state (only when the state is not the continuous villa state). It is for counting the number of times displayed. In step 048AKS020, the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol is added by 1. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 9-27) described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-28 (f), and then cleared.

When it is determined in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 9-23 that there is no predetermined display (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is not a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that serves as a look-ahead chance (other than the predetermined display, etc.). The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left-determined value stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. The right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Even if the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) are not selected from each confirmed symbol determination table so as not to be a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that becomes the look-ahead chance eye in advance. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative symbols is decided, if the combination of the decorative symbols matches the predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be performed again. Further, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, in the case of not in the probabilistic state, the combination of decorative symbols same as the predetermined display may be displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It may be there.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol, etc. after clearing the flag to the off state last time (step 048AKS022). In this way, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the look-ahead chance eye is executed with priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whereas the predetermined display is being controlled to the probabilistic state and is executed only after the end of the first jackpot game state (that is,). It is not executed in the state of consecutive villas). Further, while the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player in the probabilistic state, make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is the pre-reading chance eye or the predetermined display, and improve the interest. Even when the look-ahead chance is displayed, the predetermined display may be prioritized in the case of the probability change state. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed as the look-ahead chance eye, the player may be confused. Therefore, if the predetermined display is prioritized, the look-ahead chance for a predetermined period You may limit the execution of the eyes. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance eye may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed five times until the three times of fluctuations are completed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the look-ahead chance eyes continuously on the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the consecutive villa state is once controlled to the big hit game state, and then becomes the consecutive villa state by becoming a big hit again during the probability change state after the end (the consecutive villa flag is set to the on state). In addition, after the villa state is reached, the probabilistic change control is performed a predetermined number of times without a big hit again, and the process ends (the villa flag is cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 9-22, when it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S522; No). Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left / right confirmed stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed are the same in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right" in the display area of the image display device 5. Determine the decorative pattern of. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 and referring to a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" (big hit C or big hit F). There is), or it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined to be "sudden" or "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "sudden" or "small hit" such as the opening chance eye. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, in response to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, it is confirmed that the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes is used. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the chance eye to be updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and the predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when the probability variation control is performed in 100 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is determined whether or not it is the 100th variation. In the case of final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the final variation effect setting process (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 9-22. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is set to be visually displayed to the player for each type, or the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is set to be visually displayed to the player. Will be In the final variation effect setting process shown in FIGS. 9-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the consecutive villa flag is set to the ON state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa is in the villa (step 048AKS051).

When the villa is not in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display the respective count values provided according to the predetermined display type (for each type). (Count value display setting of) is performed (step 048AKS052). In step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (f), a setting is made to display the appearance frequencies of types A to C by a bar graph. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count values provided according to the type of the predetermined display to 0, and if the previous flag is on, clears it to the off state, and sets the acquired ball output count value to 0. After clearing (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 048AKS051 that the villa is in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is on (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls acquired during the villa. (Step 048AKS054). In addition, the number of balls (acquired balls) acquired during the consecutive villas starts counting because it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the consecutive villas are not performed, it is cleared by the above step 048AKS053, and the consecutive villas are cleared. If so, it is cleared in step 048AKS056 described later. That is, it suffices that the balls that are acquired in the jackpot game state are continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive villa flag is turned on to when it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the consecutive villa flag to the off state (step 048AKS055), and shifts to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 9-22, when it is determined in step S525 that the value is other than "probability" or "small hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of RAM 122 or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern. At this time, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is set as the final decorative symbol depending on which of the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E is the jackpot type.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined in step 048AKS031 that the final fluctuation is not in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings. (Step S530). For example, a production or a game effect in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of the variable display. Immediately announce (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by executing the effect of a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effect of the mode in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of the one-shot notification mode may be executed. Alternatively, as a notice effect during fluctuation, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" may be executed.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing a predetermined mode of effect for liveliness may be made. More specifically, it suffices to be able to perform a predetermined mode of effect, such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 illuminates, or an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image as a mini character.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects, for example, one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S532). Subsequently, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is made (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 9-28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. In the illustrated example, a predetermined display of type A is executed, not in the consecutive villas. Further, it is a probability change state, and the probability change control is performed until the fluctuation is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. Fluctuations are initiated as shown in FIG. 9-28 (a). It is assumed that FIG. 9-28 (a) shows the 99th change after the end of the big hit game state. When it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the fluctuation and the type is type A, the combination of decorative symbols of "344" as shown in FIG. 9-28 (b) (determined in step 048AKS018 of FIG. 9-23). The combination of the decorative patterns) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. 9-28 (c), the lost symbol (step 048AKS021 in FIG. 9-23). The combination of decorative patterns determined in the above) is derived and displayed. As a result, the probability change state ends. At the end of the probabilistic state, after the end of the final fluctuation, a message display indicating that effect (a message display indicating the end of the ST mode, which is the probabilistic state) is performed as shown in FIG. 9-28 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in FIG. 9-27 is displayed (graph is displayed for each type), which is a normal state. It will shift to the mode.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display result determination table. Regardless of the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value described above is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined according to whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used setting value as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading out an inappropriate set value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed a predetermined number of times of variable display or may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-19, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the above), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced, and further, the RAM 102 is like the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment. When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value as a predetermined display while the probability change state is controlled. To do. In addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is also displayed as the variable display result, so that the variation of the production can be increased and the game interest can be improved. Further, the look-ahead chance eyes may also be displayed at different ratios according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game interest because it is suggested which set value is set by the variable display result during the control to the probabilistic state.

Further, the probability change state is caused by the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit game state, or the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. finish. That is, if the jackpot game state is not reached again, the probability change state continues until at least a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, even if the hobby is controlled to the probabilistic state and the normal state is reached without being controlled to the big hit game state again, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed by displaying the predetermined display.

Further, the feature unit 048AK displays different types of predetermined displays at different ratios according to the set set values for the predetermined displays of types A to C. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being confused with the notice effect of the jackpot expectation. Further, while the look-ahead chance eye can be continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being confused with the look-ahead notice exercise by being displayed continuously.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, after being controlled to the probabilistic state, at the timing controlled to the normal state, the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed, so that the frequency of the predetermined display can be determined. Make it recognizable to others. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed, and it is possible to easily predict the set value. In addition, the count value displayed according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed when the consecutive villa flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the probability change state. Only done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily estimated by displaying the count value at the time of consecutive villas. On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. .. According to this, the winning balls in the consecutive villas are displayed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 048AK)
As shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-11, the feature unit 048AK sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) to the large hit determination value regardless of the gaming state and the set value. Although it is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 (A) and 9-29 (B), the game Regardless of the state or the set value, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value may be continuously provided.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020-1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form of setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-30, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 9-30, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 9-30, 64990 for the set value 1, 64974 for the set value 2, and 64954 for the set value 3). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or more than the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is 65208 or more, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko game machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-29, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the large hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-30, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit judgment value is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the figure As shown in 9-31 and FIG. 9-32, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 9-31, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 9-32, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the modes shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the fluctuation special chart, but the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, the numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60,000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60,000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and determining whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, as in the case of the feature portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) and is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the mode of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 048AK. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation control is always performed after the end of the big hit game state, and the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next big hit game state is started. , An example of continuing until any one of the end conditions is satisfied first, but for example, the probability variation control may be continued until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times). ) The end of the special figure game does not have to be the end condition of the probability variation control). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability change jackpot type) that is not controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is prepared, and the predetermined special figure game ends after the end of the non-probability change jackpot game state. The associative state may end at the timing when the time saving control controlled up to is completed. In such a game machine, it is possible to display a predetermined display even during control in a time saving state as well as in a probabilistic state.

Further, in such a game machine, although the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time until the variable display result becomes a big hit (in the so-called consecutive villa). Hamari state). Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls won in the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa, and the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. May be good. Further, a launch sensor may be provided, and it may be determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa because the number of launches of the game balls exceeds a predetermined number, and the setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out sensor is provided at the out port where the game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings are taken in, and it is determined that the number of out balls exceeds a predetermined number and the player has entered the state of being in a row. , The setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the so-called villa state, and to promote the launch. In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the sound may be output, a specific character may be displayed, or both may be performed according to the set setting value.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-28 (e), the predetermined display is displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 9-28 (f). An example is shown in which the count values provided according to the types of are displayed in a graph for each type, but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B (for example, a message such as pressing a button is displayed). , A button image, etc.), and based on the push sensor 35B detecting the movement of the player with respect to the push button 31B, the count value provided according to the predetermined display type may be displayed. Good. According to this, it is possible to execute the production according to the preference of the player. If the movement by the player is not detected, it is not necessary to display the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display.

(Explanation of feature 049AK)
Next, the feature portion 049AK of the present embodiment will be described. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 049AK, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state, as in the feature unit 048AK. It shall be. That is, it is assumed that the big hit types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 9-12 are prepared as the big hit types as in the feature portion 048AK. In the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 049AK, only the time saving control is executed in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure after the end of the big hit game state, and the state shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variation jackpot) or a jackpot type of jackpot H whose probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high-accuracy control nor time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, in the feature unit 049AK, when the game state is the normal state, it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes as an effect state internally provided for performing a lottery regarding the execution of the setting suggestion effect. .. The effect mode in the feature unit 049AK is, for example, one in which the player can visually recognize which effect mode is controlled by changing the displayed background image according to the effect mode being controlled, an output sound, or a lamp. It is not recognizable to the player which effect mode is controlled because the lighting pattern of is different depending on the controlled effect mode, and it is a common mode in all the effect modes, and the player Refers to an unrecognizable internal state. In the feature unit 049AK in this embodiment, the effect state is controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes only when the game state is the normal state, and is not controlled to any of the effect modes in the probabilistic state. ing.

FIG. 10-1 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode determination process executed by the feature unit 049AK. The effect mode determination process is a process for determining an effect mode to be controlled (shifted) when the next normal state is controlled (a process for determining an effect mode in the next normal state), and is step S173 in FIG. This is the process to be executed when it is determined that the effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received in the special figure hit wait process of. The effect mode refers to the effect state, and the feature unit 049AK provides three types of effect modes such as mode A, mode B, and mode C. In the feature unit 049AK, even when a common setting suggestion effect is performed, the content to be suggested differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. Further, in the feature unit 049AK, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode is controlled.

When the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) is started, the effect control Western CPU 120 determines whether or not the current game state is the normal state (049 AKS001). In the normal state (step 049AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the current effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) (step 049AKS002). The effect mode storage buffer is a buffer that stores the current effect mode and the next effect mode, and is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. In the initial state, "mode A" is stored as the current effect mode. ing.

After executing the process of step 049AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode (next effect mode) in the next normal state according to the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 10-2 (A) to 10-2 (C) (step 049AKS003). ), The effect mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) is stored as the next effect mode. Specifically, when the current effect mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode A", the next effect mode is according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-2 (A) according to the set value. To determine. When the specified current effect mode is "mode B", the next effect mode is determined according to the set value and the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-2 (B). When the specified current effect mode is "mode C", the next effect mode is determined according to the determined ratio shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) according to the set value.

In the feature unit 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A. In the feature unit 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the more the setting value is an even number and the higher the setting value (setting value “4” or “6”) is set, the more from “mode A”. The determination ratio is set so that the transition to "mode C" can be easily performed. Further, in the feature unit 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the determination ratio is set so as not to shift from "mode B" to "mode A". Further, in the feature unit 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), the more the set value is an even number and the highest set value (set value “6”) is set, the more “mode C” to “mode” are set. The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to "B".

Returning to FIG. 10-1 (A), after executing the process of step 049AKS003, or when it is determined in step 049AKS001 that it is not in the normal state (probability change state) (step 049AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 The production mode determination process ends. In the case of the probability change state, the effect mode determination process is terminated as it is at the timing when the normal state becomes a big hit (at the time of the first big hit in the consecutive villa state), the effect mode in the next normal state is already determined. This is because it is stored in the effect mode storage buffer.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect processing executed by the feature unit 049AK. The setting suggestion effect processing is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 of FIG. 7, and is a process of executing the setting suggestion effect as the ending effect. As described above, in the feature unit 049AK, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, and even when a common setting suggestion effect is performed, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The suggested content differs depending on which production mode is controlled. When the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 10-3 is started, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the current effect mode (step 049AKS011). For example, if the current effect mode is "mode A" and the next effect mode is "mode C" as an example, in step 049AKS011, "mode A" is specified as the current effect mode.

After executing the process of step 049AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-4 according to the specified effect mode. In the feature unit 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A. Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step 049AKS013). When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (step 049AKS013; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion effect process as it is.

On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, that is, when the setting suggestion effect is executed (step 049AKS013; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is any one of the setting suggestion execution tables shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) to 10-5 (C). The setting suggestion execution table of is set according to the effect mode specified in step 049AKS011, and the type of the setting suggestion effect to be executed is determined according to the set value (step 049AKS014).

10-5 (A) to 10-5 (C) are diagrams showing a configuration example of the setting suggestion execution table. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 049AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed by lighting the lamp provided on the game board 2 to any of "white", "blue", and "red". The lamp is configured to include an LED. FIG. 10-5 (A) is a setting suggestion execution table set when the current effect mode specified in step 049AKS002 is “mode A”. As shown in the figure, in the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the determination ratio is set so as to suggest that the setting is high when "red" is lit. FIG. 10-5 (B) is a setting suggestion execution table set when the current effect mode specified in step 049AKS002 is “mode B”. As shown in the figure, in the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), when "white" is lit, the ratio of being set to an odd set value is high, and "blue" is lit. When is performed, the ratio set to an even set value is high, and when "red" is lit, the determination ratio is set to suggest that the setting is high. FIG. 10-5 (C) is a setting suggestion execution table set when the current effect mode specified in step 049AKS002 is “mode C”. As shown in the figure, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 (C) deterministically notifies that the set value is an odd number when "white" is lit, and "blue". When lighting is done, it is definitely notified that it is set to an even set value, and when "red" is turned on, the determination ratio is set to suggest that it is a high setting. Has been done. That is, in the feature unit 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A.

In this way, in the feature unit 049AK, "blue" is lit when the setting suggestion effect in which "blue" is lit in the "mode B" is executed and when the setting suggestion effect is performed in the "mode C". Although it is a common setting suggestion effect such as lighting "blue" in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is executed, one suggests that the ratio of even numbered setting values is high. The other deterministically notifies that the set value is an even number. That is, when the setting suggestion effect of lighting "blue" is executed, it may or may not be determined that the set value is an even number. In this way, even if the setting suggestion effect is common, the content of the suggestion can be different depending on which of the multiple effect modes is used, and the variation related to the setting suggestion effect is increased to improve the game entertainment. Can be made to. Further, although the common setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of which of the plurality of effect modes, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation regarding the setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 executes the determined type of setting suggestion effect (step 049AKS015), and ends the setting suggestion effect process. The executed setting suggestion effect may end at the timing when the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0" in the ending effect process of step S177, for example.

Further, in the feature unit 049AK, similarly to the feature unit 048AK, the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot game state, or before the special figure game is executed the predetermined number of times. The game state is controlled to the probabilistic state until any of the conditions of the big hit game state is satisfied. In the feature unit 049AK, the probability variation state ends by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the normal state is set at the timing when the game state is controlled to the normal state. It is possible to execute a mode suggestion effect that suggests to the player which effect mode is the effect mode that shifts when controlled.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 049AK. In the variable display start setting process, the execution setting of the mode suggestion effect is performed. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6, step 048AKS010 is executed in the feature section 048AK as compared with the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 9-22) executed in the feature section 048AK. On the other hand, the feature unit 049AK executes the process of step S523. Further, the feature unit 048AK executes the process of step 048AKS032, whereas the feature unit 049AK executes the process of step 049AKS021. Since other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 9-22, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step S522 shown in FIG. 10-6 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. Is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined left-determined value stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is determined. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. The right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. In the process of step S523, it is sufficient to determine the definite decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance item symbol in response to the case where the variable symbol advance notice is being executed.

Then, in step 048AKS031, when it is determined that the variation is controlled in the probabilistic state and the final variation in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031; Yes), the execution setting of the mode suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode to be controlled in the next normal state is set. The mode suggestion effect setting process to be performed is executed (step 049AKS021). As a result, the mode suggestion effect is executed in the final variation in the probabilistic state. By executing the mode suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to make the player predict which effect mode is controlled, and it is possible to improve the game interest. It should be noted that the mode suggestion effect is executed even if the final change in the probability change state is not in progress, for example, in the special figure hit waiting process in step S173 of FIG. 7, when the change is the final change in the probability change state and the change is lost. You may. According to this, the mode suggestion effect can be executed at the timing after the final change in the probability change state, and the effect mode can be suggested at a timing closer to the return from the probability change state to the normal state.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the mode suggestion effect setting process executed in step 049AKS021 of FIG. 10-6. In the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the next effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS031). For example, exemplifying a case where the current effect mode is "mode A" and the next effect mode is "mode C", in step 049AKS031, "mode C" is specified as the next effect mode.

After executing the process of step 049AKS031, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of mode suggestion effect to be executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-8 according to the specified effect mode (step 049AKS032). As shown in FIG. 10-8, in the feature unit 049AK, the mode suggestion effect of "suggestion A" suggesting that the next mode (the effect mode that shifts when controlled to the normal state) is "mode A". , There are a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion B" suggesting that it is "mode B" and a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion C" suggesting that it is "mode C", and there are types of "suggestion C". When the mode suggestion effect is executed, the determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the next mode is "mode B" or "mode C", that is, not "mode A". As described above, in the feature unit 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the mode suggestion effect of the type of "suggestion C" is executed. The mode suggestion effect in the feature unit 049AK may suggest modes A to C as the next mode by displaying any of the characters A to C on the image display device 5, for example. For example, "Suggestion A" displays an image, "Suggestion B" lights a lamp in a predetermined color, and "Suggestion C" outputs a sound. Different types are used depending on the type of mode suggestion effect. You may perform the production of.

After returning to FIG. 10-7 and executing the process of step 049AKS032, the effect control CPU 120 updates the contents of the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS033), and ends the mode suggestion effect setting process. In the process of step 049AKS033, the content stored as the next effect mode is updated as the current effect mode. For example, when the current effect mode is "mode A" and the next effect mode is "mode C", "mode C" is shifted to the current effect mode. As a result, at the timing when the probability change state ends and the normal state is reached, the effect mode is controlled to the effect mode of the contents stored in the current effect mode of the effect mode storage buffer. For example, in the special figure hit waiting process of step S173 of FIG. 7, when it is the final fluctuation in the probability change state and the fluctuation becomes a loss, the production of the contents stored in the current production mode of the production mode storage buffer is produced. All you have to do is set to switch to the mode.

FIG. 10-9 is a timing chart showing the transition between the gaming state and the effect state. Here, a case where the current effect mode is "mode A" and the next effect mode is determined to be "mode C" will be described as an example. Further, it is assumed that the gaming state up to the jackpot 1 shown in the figure is a normal state. When a big hit occurs while the current effect mode is controlled to "mode A" (big hit 1 in the figure), the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-9. In addition, the effect mode (next mode) in the next normal state is determined (mode C is determined in this example). Then, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of the jackpot 1 and the ending of the jackpot 1 is reached, the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 10-3 is executed, and the setting suggestion effect process shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined at the indicated ratio, and when it is executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the set value according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A). Be told. As shown in FIG. 10-9, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of jackpot 1, the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state. The probability change state is determined by the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit game state, or the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Although it ends, the illustrated example shows a case where it ends when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

Subsequently, when the final fluctuation of the probability change state is reached, the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-7 is executed, and control is performed in the next normal state based on the next mode (mode C) determined when the jackpot is 1. A mode suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode to be performed is executed, and the next mode is updated to the current mode (mode C is set as the current mode). As a result, the effect mode is suggested when the setting suggestion effect is executed next, so that the player's attention can be attracted. Further, when the suggestion (suggestion C) for the effect mode C is performed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect executed after that is high, so that the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the subsequent jackpot game state is performed. It is possible to fuel the player's expectation that he / she wants to confirm the content suggested in, and to promote the operation.

As described above, the effect mode controlled by the feature unit 049AK is unrecognizable to the player. Therefore, the player predicts the next controlled effect mode by executing the mode suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the more even-numbered setting values are set and the higher setting values (setting values "4" and "6") are set, the more "mode A" is changed to "mode C". The decision ratio is set to facilitate the transition. Therefore, if the previously executed mode suggestion effect is a suggestion corresponding to mode A (suggestion A) and the mode suggestion effect executed this time is a suggestion corresponding to mode C (suggestion C), the player is notified. It can be expected that the mode A has changed to the mode C. In this case, since the player expects the set value to be "4" or "6", it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the subsequent jackpot game state suggests that the setting value is high. It is possible to arouse the expectation of the player who wants to confirm the above, and it is possible to promote the operation. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), since the determination ratio is set so as not to shift from "mode B" to "mode A", the executed mode suggestion effect corresponds to mode B. In the case of suggestion (suggestion B), the effect mode to be shifted to next is the effect mode C, which is the effect mode with high reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and to promote the operation until the next big hit game state is reached. Further, in the feature unit 049AK, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), the more the set value is an even number and the highest set value (set value “6”) is set, the more “mode C” to “mode” are set. The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to "B". Therefore, if the previously executed mode suggestion effect is a suggestion corresponding to mode C (suggestion C) and the mode suggestion effect executed this time is a suggestion corresponding to mode B (suggestion B), the player is notified. It can be expected that the transition from mode C to mode B has occurred. In this case, since the player expects the maximum setting value, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the end timing of the subsequent jackpot game state, and it is possible that the setting value is the maximum setting value. It is possible to fuel the expectation of the player who wants to confirm that the value is high, and it is possible to promote the operation.

Returning to FIG. 10-9, when the final variation of the probability change state is completed, the game state becomes the normal state, and the effect mode (mode C) determined when the jackpot is 1 is controlled. Then, when the jackpot hits again (big hit 2 in the figure), the effect mode (next mode) in the next normal state is determined, and in the ending of the jackpot 2, the effect mode C corresponding to the current effect state is shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined at the ratio shown in 4, and when it is executed, the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the set value according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 (C). Is done.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 049AK of the present embodiment, it is possible to control any of a plurality of types of effect modes as an effect state internally provided for performing a lottery regarding the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Is. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the setting suggestion effect in which "blue" is lit in the "mode B" is executed, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the "blue" is lit in the "mode C". Although it is a common setting suggestion effect such as lighting "blue" in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is executed, one of them suggests that the ratio of even numbered setting values is high. On the other hand, the other is deterministically notified that the set value is an even number. Therefore, even when a common setting suggestion effect is performed, the content to be suggested differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. According to this, by providing a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to increase the variation related to the setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 049AK of the present embodiment, although it is possible to execute a common setting suggestion effect regardless of which of the plurality of effect modes, FIG. 10-4 As shown in, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation regarding the setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 049AK, when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, it is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, but it is not controlled to any of the effect modes in the probabilistic state. That is, the number of effect modes that can be controlled when the game state is the normal state is larger than that when the game state is the probability variation permanent setting. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in a normal state which is not advantageous for the player.

Further, the effect mode in the feature unit 049AK is a common mode in any of the effect modes, and is an internal state that the player cannot recognize. Then, in the feature unit 049AK, it is possible to execute a mode suggestion effect that suggests to the player which effect mode is the effect mode that shifts when controlled to the normal state. According to this, it is possible to make the player predict which production state will be controlled, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the feature unit 049AK executes a mode suggestion effect in the final variation in the probability variation state. Further, the mode suggestion effect can be executed at the timing after the final change in the probability change state. That is, in the feature unit 049AK, the player is suggested to which effect state is controlled at the timing when the probability change state is controlled to the normal state. According to this, it is possible to attract the attention of the player at the timing of returning from the probabilistic state to the normal state.

In addition, the feature unit 049AK can execute the mode suggestion effect, and also executes the setting suggestion effect according to the effect mode as the ending effect during the big hit game state. According to this, the set value set by the combination of the mode suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be predicted, and the variation of the effect can be increased.

Further, when it is determined that the feature unit 049AK has received the effect control command for specifying to start the big hit game state in the special figure hit waiting process in step S173 of FIG. 7, it is then controlled to the normal state. Determines the effect mode to be controlled (shifted) when According to this, it is possible to improve the interest in which production mode is to be used at the timing when the jackpot game state is controlled.

(Modification example of feature part 049AK)
In the feature section 049AK, an example of determining the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed by using the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-5 in the setting suggestion effect process shown in FIG. 10-3 is shown, but this is an example. Is. The setting suggestion execution table can be arbitrarily changed, and for example, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10 may be used. Specifically, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10 (A) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is "2" or more when "red" is lit. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10 (B) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is "3" or more when "red" is lit. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 10-10 (C) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is "4" or more when "red" is lit. In this way, when the common "red" is lit, which of "2" to "4" the set value is equal to or higher depends on the controlled production mode. May be good. According to this, when the mode suggestion effect of suggestion C is executed, it is possible to improve the expectation that "red" is lit in the setting suggestion effect executed after that.

Further, in the feature unit 049AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect state is controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes only when the game state is the normal state, and is not controlled to any of the effect modes in the probabilistic state. However, this is just an example. There may be an effect mode that is controlled in the probabilistic state. The number of effect modes controlled in the probabilistic state may be smaller than the number of effect modes controlled in the normal state. According to this, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect during control in the normal state. It should be noted that the effect mode that can be controlled in the probabilistic state may also be determined when determining the effect mode that can be controlled in the normal state. Then, at the ending of the jackpot game state in the consecutive villa state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the effect mode in the probability change state.

Further, in the feature unit 049AK in the above embodiment, when it is determined that the effect control command for specifying to start the big hit game state is received in the special figure hit waiting process in step S173, the normal state is next. An example of determining the effect mode to be controlled (shifted) when controlled is shown, but this is an example. The determination timing may be, for example, in the jackpot game state or in the probability change state. Further, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect does not have to be during the ending effect in the jackpot game state, and may be in a variable state (for example, during the reach effect of the super reach or before the reach state is reached). In this case, in the variable display start setting process of step S171, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the effect mode according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-4. According to this, it is possible to raise the player's interest in which production state is controlled. Further, the mode suggestion effect does not have to be the final variation in the probability variation state, and may be performed, for example, in any variation in the probability variation state, or may be performed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may be, for example, executed every 50 fluctuations in the normal state, or a predetermined time or measurement period set by a real-time clock, an internal timer, or the like becomes a predetermined period. It may be executed at the timing. Further, in each variation, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed may be determined at a different determination ratio according to the display result, or whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the display result. You may. In the setting suggestion effect, it may be suggested that the set value has been changed.

Further, in the case where only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and the state shifts to the low accuracy high base state, the mode suggestion effect may be executed in the fluctuation when the time saving control ends. Further, for example, in a game machine in which the probability variation control continues until the next jackpot game state is started, the jackpot is a non-probability variation jackpot type, and the time saving control is completed thereafter, the consecutive villa state is terminated. As described above, one of the effect modes may be controlled as the effect mode in the probability change state, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the fluctuation in the probability change state based on the effect mode. More specifically, when the number of game balls won in the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, or when the number of fired game balls exceeds a predetermined number, the player enters a state of being in a row. It may be determined that the device has been used, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed. According to this, it is possible to improve the hobby of playing games in the so-called villa state.

Further, in the feature unit 049AK in the above embodiment, an example in which "mode A" is stored as the current effect mode in the effect mode storage buffer in the initial state is shown, but this is an example. When the power is turned on, the current production mode may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is sufficient that the determination ratio of the effect mode to be set differs according to the set value at the time of turning on the power. According to this, the lottery regarding the production state becomes diverse, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, it suffices if the mode suggestion effect can be executed based on the effect mode in the variation after the power is turned on (for example, the first variation or the variation of any of the 10 times).

Further, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio determined to the mode C becomes high. In the feature unit 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A. Therefore, according to this, the power supply Since the setting suggestion effect executed in the first game at the time of input suggests highly reliable contents, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to start the game immediately after the opening of the game hall. Since the effect mode is not backed up at the time of power failure, the effect mode after restoration may be different from the effect mode before restoration. In such a case, when the mode suggestion effect of the type of "suggestion C" is executed, it is definitely notified that the next mode is not "mode A", but in reality, "mode A" In some cases, the player is confused, the reliability of the mode suggestion effect is lowered, and the game interest is lowered. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, in the mode suggestion effect at the time of power-on, a table in which the determination ratio is set so as not to be definitively notified is used instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-8. The type of mode suggestion effect to be executed may be determined.

(Explanation of feature section 050AK)
Next, the feature portion 050AK of the present embodiment will be described. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, even in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 050AK, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state. It shall be. That is, it is assumed that the big hit types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 9-12 are prepared as the big hit types as in the feature portion 048AK. In the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 050AK, only the time saving control is executed in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure after the end of the big hit game state, and the state shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variation jackpot) or a jackpot type of jackpot H whose probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high-accuracy control nor time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

The feature unit 050AK suggests the set value set by the specific effect executed before being controlled to the big hit game state and the special effect executed in the big hit game state. As will be described in detail later, the specific effect in the feature unit 050AK is an effect in which one of a plurality of types of character images is displayed according to a set value in the latter half of the super reach effect. Further, the special effect in the feature unit 050AK is an effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state when the specific effect is executed, and the character displayed in the executed specific effect battles with the enemy character. It is a battle production to perform. Note that the feature unit 050AK in this embodiment shows an example of executing a special effect as an ending effect in the jackpot game state, but for example, the special effect may be executed as a round game in the jackpot game state. In addition, the special effect may be executed only in a specific round such as the 5th round, or multiple rounds in the latter half of the total number of rounds such as the 5th to 8th rounds (in the case of 8 rounds in the jackpot B). You may perform a special effect over.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 050AK. The variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-1 is compared with the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 9-22) executed by the feature unit 048AK, whereas the feature unit 048AK executes step 048AKS010. , The feature unit 050AK executes the process of step S523 (the description is omitted because it is the same as the feature unit 049AK). Further, the feature unit 048AK executes the processes of step 048AKS031 and step 048AKS032, whereas the feature unit 050AK executes the processes of steps S528 and step 050AKS001. Since other processes are the same as the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 9-22, the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing any of the processes of step S524, step S527, and step S526 shown in FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step S528). In the process of step S528, it may be determined whether or not the variation pattern is the super reach by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. When it is determined in step S528 that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect execution setting process for executing the specific effect (step 050AKS001).

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect execution setting process executed in step 050AKS001 shown in FIG. 11-1. In the specific effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-3 (step 050AKS011). Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the determination ratio is common regardless of the variable display result, the determination ratio may be different depending on the variable display result. Further, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach.

Returning to FIG. 11-2, after executing the process of step 050AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific effect is executed, that is, whether or not the specific effect is executed (step 050AKS012). When the specific effect is not executed (step 050AKS012; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific effect execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, when the specific effect is executed, that is, when the specific effect is executed (step 050AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the specific effect to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-4. Determine (step 050AKS013).

In the feature unit 050AK, as shown in the figure, specific effects of the types "Character A" to "Character C" are prepared as specific effects. The specific effects of "Character A" to "Character C" are effects of displaying images of "Character A" to "Character C", respectively. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the feature unit 050AK, when the specific effect of the type of "Character C" is executed, the set value is 2 or more (that is, it is not the minimum set value 1). The decision rate is set so that it can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player who wants to obtain a sense of security that the value is not the minimum set value by executing the specific effect of the type of character C. Note that the feature unit 050AK in this embodiment shows an example in which the type of the specific effect to be executed is determined at a different ratio according to the set value, regardless of which set value is set. It may be determined at a common rate.

In the feature unit 050AK, each type of character image is displayed in the latter half of the super reach (a predetermined time before the variable display result is displayed) in common with each type of "character A" to "character C". The display timing of the character image is predetermined. The display timing of each character image may be different depending on the type of specific effect to be executed. For example, the type of character B may be displayed at a later timing than that of character A, and the character C may be displayed at a later timing than that of character B. By the process of step 050AKS013 in FIG. 11-2, the type of the specific effect to be executed is determined, so that the execution timing (character image display timing) is also determined. The timing for executing the specific effect may be set as a timer such as 10 seconds before the variable display result is displayed. It should be noted that the setting may be 40 seconds after the start of the reach effect of the super reach. Since the period of reach production differs depending on the type of super reach, according to such a setting, depending on the type of super reach, the specific production will be executed at an early stage during the reach production period of super reach. , The range of production can be expanded and the interest can be improved. In the feature unit 050AK, the specific effect is executed in the latter half of the super reach effect, but any timing can be used before the big hit (more specifically, before the variable display result is displayed). It may be. It does not have to be executed during super reach, it may be executed every 50 fluctuations regardless of whether it reaches reach, or it may be executed for a predetermined time or measurement period by a real-time clock or an internal timer. May be executed at the timing when the predetermined period is reached.

After executing the process of step 050AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect flag indicating that the specific effect is to be executed in the ON state (step 050AKS014), and then ends the specific effect execution setting process. The specific effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is cleared to the off state by executing a special effect described later. Further, in the feature unit 050AK in this embodiment, although the specific effect is executed even when the variable display result is "missing", the special effect is not executed (because it is executed in the jackpot game state). ). Therefore, the specific effect flag set in the on state in step 050AKS014 is cleared to the off state by executing the special effect described later when the variable display result is "big hit", while the variable display. If the result is "missing", in the special figure hit waiting process in step S173, the reception waiting time of the command is reduced without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When it has passed, it may be cleared to the off state. Further, once the specific effect is executed, it may be executed for a period until the variable display result is derived and displayed (the character image of the determined type may be continuously displayed). That is, the specific effect execution period may be a period from the latter half of the reach effect of the super reach until the variable display result is derived and displayed. If, for example, a specific effect is executed every 50 fluctuations, or at a timing when a predetermined time or measurement period reaches a predetermined period by a real-time clock or an internal timer, the specific effect is deleted after the fluctuation and then again. It may be displayed when the execution timing comes. Further, once executed, the specific effect may be continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations until the variable display result becomes a big hit (character images may be continuously displayed). ). In this case, in the special figure hit waiting process of step S173, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the specific effect Instead of clearing the flag to the off state, you can leave it on. Then, if the specific effect flag is already on in step 050AKS001, the specific effect execution setting process may be terminated. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which kind of specific effect the executed specific effect was.

FIG. 11-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect processing executed by the feature unit 050AK. The special effect processing is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 of FIG. 7, and is a process of executing a special effect corresponding to the executed specific effect as the ending effect. When the special effect process shown in FIG. 11-5 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific effect flag is set to the ON state (step 050AKS021). When the specific effect flag is off (step 050AKS021; No), the special effect process is terminated because the specific effect has not been executed.

On the other hand, when the specific effect flag is on (step 050AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of the executed specific effect (step 050AKS022). For example, when the type of the specific effect is determined in step 050AKS013 of FIG. 11-2, the determined content is stored, and in step 050AKS022, the type of the specific effect is specified by confirming this content. In addition, the specific effect flag A to the specific effect flag C may be prepared according to the type of the specific effect, and the corresponding type of the specific effect flag may be set to the ON state in step 050AKS014 of FIG. 11-2. In that case, in step 050AKS022, the type of the specific effect may be specified depending on which specific effect flag is in the ON state.

After executing the process of step 050AKS022 in FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 follows the determination ratio shown in any of FIGS. 11-6 (A) to (C) according to the type of the specified specific effect. The type of special effect to be executed is determined according to the set value, and the determined type of special effect is executed (step 050AKS023). As described above, the special effect executed by the feature unit 050AK is a battle effect in which the character displayed in the specific effect battles with the enemy character, and as shown in the figure, "victory", "draw", There are special effects such as "defeat". "Victory", "Draw", and "Defeat" each indicate the result of the battle production. In the feature section 050AK, a battle production is performed as a special production, and the result differs depending on the type of the special production. However, a battle production, a conversation production (a production that talks with another character), and a dance production (character). The type of production itself may be different depending on the type of special production, such as (the production of dancing).

FIG. 11-6 (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the type of the executed specific effect is “character A”. As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the specific effect of the type of "Character A" is executed, when the character of "Character A" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. When this is done, the determination ratio is set so as to definitively notify that the minimum set value "1" is denied (the set value is "2" or more). Therefore, it is possible to fuel the player's expectation that the special effect of "victory" is executed to obtain a sense of security that the value is not the minimum set value.

FIG. 11-6 (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the type of the executed specific effect is “character B”. As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the specific effect of the type of "Character B" is executed, when the character of "Character B" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. When this is done, the determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the set value is "3" or more. Further, FIG. 11-6 (C) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the type of the executed specific effect is “character C”. As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the specific effect of the type of "Character C" is executed, when the character of "Character C" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. When this is done, the determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the set value is "4" or more. As described above, in the feature unit 050AK in this embodiment, when a special effect of the type of "victory" is executed, a definite notification regarding the set value is performed (for example, it is definite that the set value has been changed). It is possible to improve the player's expectation that a special effect of the type of "win" will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, after executing the process of step 050AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 clears the specific effect flag to the off state (step 050AKS024), and then ends the special effect process. In the feature unit 050AK in this embodiment, the execution setting of the specific effect is set in step 050AKS001 of FIG. 11-1, and the special effect is executed in step 050AKS023 of FIG. 11-5. (Presence / absence of execution, type to be executed, etc.) is determined by two processes. For example, in step 050AKS001 of FIG. 11-1, the presence / absence and type of execution of the specific effect and the special effect are collectively determined. May be good. In this case, if the variable display result is "missing", it may be decided not to execute the special effect.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a specific effect and a special effect are executed. In the illustrated example, the specific effect of "Character A" is executed, and the special effect of "Victory" is executed, that is, the setting suggestion effect of the content that definitely notifies that it is the minimum set value is performed. An example is shown. The variable display is started as shown in FIG. 11-7 (a), the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 11-7 (b), and after developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (c). In addition, the specific effect execution period is set in the latter half of the reach effect of Super Reach, and the specific effect is executed. As shown in the figure, the image CH1 as the ally character A is displayed in the lower right area of the image display device 5 by executing the specific effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (d), the variable display result is displayed and controlled to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (e), a number of round games are performed according to the jackpot type. Then, when the ending of the jackpot game state is reached, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (f) and 11-7 (g), a special effect as the ending effect is executed, and the image CH1 as the ally character A displayed in the specific effect is displayed. , The image CH2 as an enemy character is displayed, and the effect of each character performing a battle is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (h), the battle is won, and the jackpot game state ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 050K of the present embodiment, the specific effect executed in the latter half of the reach effect of the super reach and the special effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state are set. Suggests about the settings that have been made. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation related to the setting suggestion effect depending on the type of the specific effect and the special effect to be executed, and improve the game entertainment.

Further, once the specific effect in the feature unit 050AK is executed, it is executed for a period until the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, once the specific effect in the feature unit 050AK is executed, it may be continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations until the variable display result becomes a big hit. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which kind of specific effect the executed specific effect was.

(Modification example of feature part 050AK)
In the feature unit 050AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which one of a plurality of types of character images is displayed according to a set value in the latter half of the super reach effect as a specific effect. , This is an example. The character image displayed as the specific effect may be, for example, an eye-catching image. The eye-catching image is an image that is displayed for a relatively short time (constant at 1 second in this example) sandwiched between the effects (see, for example, FIG. 11-8 (e)). In addition, the eye-catching image may contain characters that are not related to the production content related to the lottery result related to the game (for example, characters such as the model name of the game machine), which may catch the eyes of the player. It is preferable that the image is taken away. The eye-catching image may be displayed when the variable display result is "missing". Then, the special effect may be executed when a big hit occurs in the variable display performed after the variable display in which the eye-catching image is displayed.

In this example, the eye-catching image is displayed after the background of the super reach is displayed and before the background of the decorative pattern until the reach state is displayed. Here, the background refers to all images (still images, moving images) other than decorative symbols (pictured symbols, pictureless symbols, small symbols) in the variable display, and is not only a background image but also a character image. It also includes images such as CG images and live-action images.

FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation in the case of displaying an eye-catching image as a character image displayed as a specific effect. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (a) to 11-8 (b), the normal background (here, from the time when the command at the start of fluctuation such as the fluctuation start command is received until the reach state is reached) The background of the mountain) is displayed, and the variable display of the Gothic decorative pattern is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (c), when the reach state is reached, the super reach background (here, the image of the universe) is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the small symbol is matched with the super reach background. It is switched and executed in order at a predetermined timing. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (d), the super reach background is displayed as in FIG. 11-8 (c) from the continuation of FIG. 11-8 (c) until the lost symbol is displayed. The variable display of the small symbol (only during the reach state) and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the Mincho style (from the reach state to the display of the lost symbol) are switched in order at a predetermined timing according to the super reach background. Will be executed. The Ming dynasty decorative symbol of the lost symbol is displayed in a shaking display mode (a mode indicating that the display result is undecided).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (e), the small symbol in the shaking display mode is displayed for a predetermined period after the lost symbol is displayed (1 second in the present embodiment). At the same time, an eye-catching image is displayed instead of the background. The eye-catching image in this example may be any character image of any of the types "Character A" to "Character C" in the above embodiment, and an image in which the model name of the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is added. It may be. In addition, during the display of the eye-catching image, the transmittance of the image of the small symbol may be increased or the display of the small symbol may be omitted as compared with the case before the display of the eye-catching image.

After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (f), the background is switched to the normal background, and the lost symbol of the Gothic decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the final decorative symbol. Then, when a command at the start of fluctuation such as the next fluctuation start command is received, the next fluctuation display is started as shown in FIG. 11-8 (g). The mode of variable display at this time is the same as in FIG. 11-8 (a).

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (e), since the lost symbol of the small symbol is displayed during the display of the eye-catching image, the player can confirm the variable display result. Further, since the types of the eye-catching images are displayed at different ratios according to the set values, the player's attention can be drawn to the types of the displayed eye-catching images. Further, since the eye-catching image is displayed as a specific effect when the lost pattern is displayed, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the special effect to be executed after that. After the eye-catching image is displayed and then switched to the normal background, it may be possible to execute a relief effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 050AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific effect is an effect of displaying a character image in the latter half of the super reach effect, but this is an example. The specific effect may be, for example, a mode suggestion effect in the feature unit 049AK. Specifically, as a mode suggestion effect suggesting which of the effect modes A to C is the effect state, the effect mode is set by displaying a character image of any of the characters A to C according to the effect state. Suggesting, at the ending in the jackpot game state, as a special effect, a battle effect by the displayed character may be executed. According to this, by providing a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestions regarding the set value and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in such a case, the current effect mode is determined by lottery at the time of turning on the power, and the effect is changed in the fluctuation after the power is turned on (for example, the first fluctuation or the fluctuation of any of 10 times). It suffices if the mode suggestion effect can be executed based on the mode. Further, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio determined to the mode C becomes high. In addition, since the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled in the order of mode C> mode B> mode A is high, the first game at the time of power-on , The setting suggestion effect executed as a combination of the specific effect and the special effect suggests highly reliable contents. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the game after the power is turned on.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 048AK, the feature portion 049AK, and the feature portion 050AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in the probabilistic state, the setting value is suggested by a predetermined display like the feature part 048AK, and in the normal state, the set value is set in the ending in the jackpot game state based on the controlled mode like the feature part 049AK. May make suggestions about. Further, as described above, the mode suggestion effect in the feature unit 049AK may be set as the specific effect in the feature unit 050AK, and the setting value may be suggested by the specific effect and the special effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit Z1 ... Controller image Z17 ... Handle image Z3 ... Push button image ZA1-5 ... Parts image ZB1-4 ... Parts image ZC1-5 ... Parts image

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result.
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
A promotion effect executing means capable of executing a promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an action that can be detected by the detection means, and a promotion effect executing means.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific effect image changes stepwise before the promotion effect is executed.
With
The promotion effect execution means
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect and the second aspect in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than the case where the promotion effect of the first aspect is executed. Yes,
When the display mode of the specific effect image changes to the specific display mode in the specific effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second aspect.
The specific effect executing means can display a plurality of the specific effect images in a mode in which it is difficult to specify which of the promotion effect of the first aspect and the promotion effect of the second aspect is executed.
further,
A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state, and
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means capable of controlling the special state having a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state is provided.
As the display result of the variable display when controlled to the special state, the ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result is set according to the set value set by the setting means. Make it different
A game machine characterized by that.

Images